WO2021037103A1 - Refrigerator having switch assembly - Google Patents

Refrigerator having switch assembly Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021037103A1
WO2021037103A1 PCT/CN2020/111583 CN2020111583W WO2021037103A1 WO 2021037103 A1 WO2021037103 A1 WO 2021037103A1 CN 2020111583 W CN2020111583 W CN 2020111583W WO 2021037103 A1 WO2021037103 A1 WO 2021037103A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
shaft
section
door
opening angle
free section
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/111583
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
李康
夏恩品
朱小兵
Original Assignee
青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司
海尔智家股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN201910804448.1A external-priority patent/CN112444086B/en
Priority claimed from CN201910803419.3A external-priority patent/CN112444066B/en
Priority claimed from CN201910803432.9A external-priority patent/CN112444071B/en
Application filed by 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司, 海尔智家股份有限公司 filed Critical 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司
Publication of WO2021037103A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021037103A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05DHINGES OR SUSPENSION DEVICES FOR DOORS, WINDOWS OR WINGS
    • E05D7/00Hinges or pivots of special construction
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F25REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
    • F25DREFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F25D11/00Self-contained movable devices, e.g. domestic refrigerators
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F25REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
    • F25DREFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F25D23/00General constructional features
    • F25D23/02Doors; Covers

Definitions

  • the invention relates to the technical field of household appliances, and in particular to a refrigerator with a switching component.
  • the object of the present invention is to provide a refrigerator with a switch assembly, which can effectively improve the degree of freedom of opening and closing the door.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a refrigerator with a switch assembly, including a box body, a door body for opening and closing the box body, and a hinge assembly connecting the box body and the door body. It includes a receiving chamber and a pivot side connected to a hinge assembly.
  • the hinge assembly includes a first hinge part, a second hinge part, and a switching assembly connecting the first hinge part and the second hinge part.
  • the first hinge member first moves relative to the switch assembly, and then the second hinge member moves relative to the switch assembly, wherein the hinge assembly first drives the door body to pivot The side moves toward the accommodating chamber, and then the hinge assembly drives the door body to move from the accommodating chamber toward the pivoting side.
  • the first hinge part is fixed to the box body
  • the second hinge part is fixed to the door body
  • the switching assembly includes a first matching part and a second matching part
  • the first hinge part is fixed to the box body
  • the second hinge part is fixed to the door body
  • the switching assembly includes a first matching part and a second matching part
  • the second The hinge member and the second matching member move relative to each other to drive the door body to move from the containing chamber toward the pivot side, and then the first hinge member and the second matching member move relative to each other to drive the door body relative to each other.
  • the box body rotates in situ.
  • the box body includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and the door body includes a front wall away from the accommodating chamber and The side wall always sandwiched between the front wall and the accommodating chamber, there is a side edge between the front wall and the side wall, when the door is opened from the closed state to the first opening angle During the process, the side edge moves to the side of the outer side close to the containing chamber.
  • the switching assembly includes a first switching element and a second switching element that cooperate with each other.
  • first switching element and a second switching element that cooperate with each other.
  • the first switching element and the second switching element are relatively stationary, and when the door body is at a position that continues to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle During the process, the first switching element moves relative to the second switching element so that the second hinge element is separated from the limit of the second matching element, and the first matching element limits the first Hinge pieces.
  • the first hinge member and the first matching member realize relative movement through the first shaft body group and the first groove body group that cooperate with each other, and the second hinge member The relative movement with the second matching member is achieved through the second shaft body group and the second groove body group that cooperate with each other.
  • the first shaft body group includes a first shaft body and a second shaft body.
  • the groove body group includes a first groove body matched with the first shaft body and a second groove body matched with the second shaft body
  • the second shaft body group includes a third shaft body and a fourth shaft body
  • the second groove body group includes a third groove body matched with the third shaft body and a fourth groove body matched with the fourth shaft body.
  • the first hinge member includes the first shaft body and the second shaft body
  • the first matching member includes the first groove body and the second groove
  • the second matching member includes the third shaft body and the fourth shaft body
  • the second hinge member includes the third groove body and the fourth groove body.
  • the first tank includes a first upper tank located on the first switching member and a first lower tank located on the second switching member, the first upper The trough body includes a first upper free section, the first lower trough body includes a first lower free section, the second trough body includes a second upper trough body located at the first switching member and a second upper trough located at the second switch
  • the first switching member and the second switching member are relatively stationary, the first upper free section and the first lower free section overlap to form a first free section, and the second upper free section is The second lower free section overlaps to form a second free section, the first shaft body moves in the first free section, the second shaft body moves in the second free section, and the third shaft body And/or the fourth shaft body is limited to the limit section so that the switching assembly limits the second hinge member, when the door body is at a position where the door body continues to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle
  • the first switching element and the second switching element move relative to each other so that the fourth shaft body separates from the limiting section, and the first shaft body and/or the second shaft body Is limited to the locking section so that the switching assembly limits the first hinge member.
  • the third shaft body When moving in the third free section, the fourth shaft
  • the locking section includes a first upper locking section located in the first upper tank, a first lower locking section located in the first lower tank, and The second upper locking section of the second upper tank body and the second lower locking section located on the second lower tank body, the limiting section includes a fourth limiting section located on the fourth tank body,
  • the fourth shaft is limited to the fourth limiting section, and when the door is at the first opening angle, it continues to open to In the process of the second opening angle, the first shaft body is confined to the first upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time, and the second shaft body is confined to the second upper locking section at the same time.
  • the locking section and the second lower locking section, and the fourth shaft body is separated from the fourth limiting section.
  • first upper locking section and the first lower locking section are always mutually staggered, and the second upper locking section and the second lower locking section are always mutually offset. stagger.
  • the first free section includes an initial position and a stop position that are relatively set
  • the second free section includes a first section and a second section that are connected.
  • the third shaft body rotates in situ in the third free section, and the fourth shaft body is based on the third shaft body It moves in the fourth free section for the center of the circle.
  • first distance between the center of the first shaft and the side edges there is a first distance between the center of the first shaft and the side edges, and a second distance is between the center of the first shaft and the front wall, There is a third distance between the center of the first shaft and the side wall, a fourth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side edges, and the center of the third shaft is There is a fifth distance between the front walls, and a sixth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side walls.
  • the first distance, the second distance, and the third distance all show a decreasing trend first and then an increasing trend, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle ,
  • the fourth pitch, the fifth pitch, and the sixth pitch remain unchanged.
  • the first free section includes a relatively set initial position and a stop position
  • the third free section includes a relatively set starting position and a pivot position
  • the fourth free section It includes a connected moving section and a rotating section.
  • the second shaft body moves in the second free section to drive the first
  • a shaft body moves from the initial position to the stop position, the door body moves from the pivoting side toward the accommodating chamber, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle
  • the fourth shaft moves in the moving section to drive the third shaft to move from the starting position to the pivot position, and then the third shaft moves to the pivot position.
  • Ground rotation the fourth shaft body moves in the rotating section with the third shaft body as the center of the circle.
  • first distance between the center of the first shaft and the side edges there is a first distance between the center of the first shaft and the side edges, and a second distance is between the center of the first shaft and the front wall
  • a third distance between the center of the first shaft and the side wall There is a fourth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side edges, and the center of the third shaft is
  • the center of the third shaft is
  • the first distance, the second distance, and the third distance all show a decreasing trend.
  • the fourth distance , The fifth distance and the sixth distance both show an increasing trend first and then remain unchanged.
  • the first switching element and the second switching element are connected to each other through a fifth shaft body, and when the door body is at a first opening angle, it continues to open to a second opening angle During the process, the first shaft moves to the locking section with the fifth shaft as the center.
  • the first switching element is closer to the first hinge element than the second switching element.
  • the first switching member includes the third shaft body, the second switching member has a through hole, and the third shaft body extends to the through hole through the through hole.
  • the third groove body, the second switching member includes the fourth shaft body, and the fourth shaft body extends to the fourth groove body.
  • the box body includes an opening and a front end surface arranged around the opening, and there is a first distance between the first shaft body and the front end surface. In the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a second distance between the third shaft body and the front end surface, and the second distance is greater than the first distance.
  • the refrigerator further includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and there is a third distance between the first shaft body and the outer side surface, when When the door is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a fourth distance between the third shaft and the outer side surface, and the fourth distance is smaller than the third distance .
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a free embedded refrigerator with a multi-axis hinge assembly, including a box body, a door body for opening and closing the box body, and a connecting box body and the door body.
  • a hinge assembly the box body includes a receiving chamber and a pivot side connected to the hinge assembly
  • the hinge assembly includes a first hinge part fixed to the box body, a second hinge part fixed to the door body, and a hinge part connected to the door body.
  • a shaft body group includes a first shaft body and a second shaft body.
  • the first groove body group includes a first free section, a second free section, and a locking section.
  • the first free section includes a relatively set initial position and In the stop position, the second free section includes a first section and a second section that are connected, and the second hinge member and the switching assembly are opposed to each other through a second shaft body group and a second groove body group that cooperate with each other Movement
  • the second shaft body group includes a third shaft body and a fourth shaft body
  • the second groove body group includes a third free section, a fourth free section and a limit section, when the door body is in a closed state
  • the first shaft is located at the initial position, the second shaft is located at an end of the first section away from the second section, and the fourth shaft is located at the limiting section so that The switching assembly limits the second hinge member.
  • the second shaft body moves in the first section to drive the The first shaft moves from the initial position to the stop position, the door moves from the pivoting side toward the accommodating chamber, and then the second shaft moves in the second section to drive the The first shaft moves toward the initial position, the door moves from the accommodating chamber toward the pivoting side, and when the door is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle, the The fourth shaft body is separated from the limiting section, and the first shaft body and/or the second shaft body is limited in the locking section so that the switching assembly limits the first hinge member, when When the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the third shaft body rotates in situ in the third free section, and the fourth shaft body rotates with the third shaft The body is centered and moves in the fourth free section.
  • the box body includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path
  • the door body includes a front wall away from the accommodating chamber and The side wall always sandwiched between the front wall and the accommodating chamber, there is a side edge between the front wall and the side wall, when the door is opened from the closed state to the first opening angle
  • the door body moves from the pivoting side toward the accommodating chamber so that the side edge moves to the side of the outer side close to the accommodating chamber, and then the door body is moved from the accommodating chamber Moving toward the pivoting side so that the side edge remains on the side of the outer side surface close to the receiving chamber.
  • the first hinge member includes the first shaft body and the second shaft body
  • the switching assembly includes a first groove body having the first free section
  • the second groove body of the second free section includes a third groove body having the third free section and a third groove body having the first free section.
  • the fourth tank with four free sections.
  • the switching assembly includes a first switching member and a second switching member that cooperate with each other, and the first tank includes a first upper tank located on the first switching member and a first upper tank located on the first switching member.
  • the first free section includes a first upper free section located in the first upper tank body and a first lower free section located in the first lower tank body
  • the second tank body includes a second upper tank body located in the first switching member and a second lower tank body located in the second switching member
  • the second free section includes a second upper tank body located in the The second upper free section and the second lower free section located in the second lower tank, when the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the first switching member and the The second switching member is relatively stationary, the first upper free section and the first lower free section overlap to form the first free section, and the second upper free section and the second lower free section overlap to form the first free section.
  • the first switching element moves relative to the second switching element so that the fourth axis
  • the body is separated from the limiting section, and the first shaft body and/or the second shaft body is limited to the locking section, when the door body continues to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle
  • the first switching element and the second switching element are relatively stationary.
  • the locking section includes a first upper locking section communicating with the first upper free section, a first lower locking section communicating with the first lower free section, and a communicating station.
  • the first shaft body is confined to the first upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time
  • the second shaft body is confined to the second upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time.
  • the second lower locking section is a first upper locking section communicating with the first upper free section, a first lower locking section communicating with the first lower free section, and a communicating station.
  • first upper locking section and the first lower locking section are always mutually staggered, and the second upper locking section and the second lower locking section are always mutually offset. stagger.
  • first distance between the center of the first shaft and the side edges there is a first distance between the center of the first shaft and the side edges, and a second distance is between the center of the first shaft and the front wall, There is a third distance between the center of the first shaft and the side wall, a fourth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side edges, and the center of the third shaft is There is a fifth distance between the front walls, and a sixth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side walls.
  • the first distance, the second distance, and the third distance all show a decreasing trend first and then an increasing trend, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle ,
  • the fourth pitch, the fifth pitch, and the sixth pitch remain unchanged.
  • the first switching element and the second switching element are connected to each other through a fifth shaft body, and when the door body is at a first opening angle, it continues to open to a second opening angle During the process, the first shaft moves to the locking section with the fifth shaft as the center.
  • the first switching element is closer to the first hinge element than the second switching element.
  • the first switching member includes the third shaft body, the second switching member has a through hole, and the third shaft body extends to the through hole through the through hole.
  • the third groove body, the second switching member includes the fourth shaft body, and the fourth shaft body extends to the fourth groove body.
  • the box body includes an opening and a front end surface arranged around the opening, and there is a first distance between the first shaft body and the front end surface. In the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a second distance between the third shaft body and the front end surface, and the second distance is greater than the first distance.
  • the refrigerator further includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and there is a third distance between the first shaft body and the outer side surface, when When the door is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a fourth distance between the third shaft and the outer side surface, and the fourth distance is smaller than the third distance .
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides an embedded refrigerator with a multi-axis hinge assembly, including a box body, a door body for opening and closing the box body, and a hinge connecting the box body and the door body Assembly
  • the box body includes a receiving chamber and a pivot side connected to a hinge assembly
  • the hinge assembly includes a first hinge part fixed to the box body, a second hinge part fixed to the door body, and a second hinge part connected to the first hinge part.
  • a hinge part and a switching assembly of the second hinge part, the first hinge part and the switching assembly realize relative movement through a first shaft group and a first groove body group that cooperate with each other, the first
  • the shaft body group includes a first shaft body and a second shaft body.
  • the first groove body group includes a first free section, a second free section and a locking section.
  • the first free section includes a relatively set initial position and a stop.
  • Position, the second hinge member and the switching assembly realize relative movement through a second shaft body group and a second groove body group that cooperate with each other, and the second shaft body group includes a third shaft body and a fourth shaft Body, the second slot body group includes a third free section, a fourth free section and a limiting section, the third free section includes a relatively set starting position and a pivot position, and the fourth free section includes a connected
  • the first shaft is located at the initial position
  • the second shaft is located at one end of the second free section
  • the third shaft Body is located in the starting position
  • the fourth shaft body is located in the limiting section so that the switching assembly limits the second hinge member, when the door body is opened from the closed state to the first open
  • the second shaft moves in the second free section to drive the first shaft to move from the initial position to the stop position
  • the box body includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and the door body includes a front wall away from the accommodating chamber and The side wall always sandwiched between the front wall and the accommodating chamber, there is a side edge between the front wall and the side wall, when the door is opened from the closed state to the first opening angle During the process, the side edge moves to the side of the outer side close to the containing chamber.
  • the first hinge member includes the first shaft body and the second shaft body
  • the switching assembly includes a first groove body having the first free section
  • the second groove body of the second free section includes a third groove body having the third free section and a third groove body having the first free section.
  • the fourth tank with four free sections.
  • the switching assembly includes a first switching member and a second switching member that cooperate with each other, and the first tank includes a first upper tank located on the first switching member and a first upper tank located on the first switching member.
  • the first free section includes a first upper free section located in the first upper tank body and a first lower free section located in the first lower tank body
  • the second tank body includes a second upper tank body located in the first switching member and a second lower tank body located in the second switching member
  • the second free section includes a second upper tank body located in the The second upper free section and the second lower free section located in the second lower tank, when the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the first switching member and the The second switching member is relatively stationary, the first upper free section and the first lower free section overlap to form the first free section, and the second upper free section and the second lower free section overlap to form the first free section.
  • the first switching element moves relative to the second switching element so that the fourth axis
  • the body is separated from the limiting section, and the first shaft body and/or the second shaft body is limited to the locking section, when the door body continues to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle
  • the first switching element and the second switching element are relatively stationary.
  • the locking section includes a first upper locking section communicating with the first upper free section, a first lower locking section communicating with the first lower free section, and a communicating station.
  • the first shaft body is confined to the first upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time
  • the second shaft body is confined to the second upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time.
  • the second lower locking section is a first upper locking section communicating with the first upper free section, a first lower locking section communicating with the first lower free section, and a communicating station.
  • first upper locking section and the first lower locking section are always mutually staggered, and the second upper locking section and the second lower locking section are always mutually offset. stagger.
  • first distance between the center of the first shaft and the side edges there is a first distance between the center of the first shaft and the side edges, and a second distance is between the center of the first shaft and the front wall
  • a third distance between the center of the first shaft and the side wall There is a fourth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side edges, and the center of the third shaft is
  • the center of the third shaft is
  • the first distance, the second distance, and the third distance all show a decreasing trend.
  • the fourth distance , The fifth distance and the sixth distance both show an increasing trend first and then remain unchanged.
  • the first switching element and the second switching element are connected to each other through a fifth shaft body, and when the door body is at a first opening angle, it continues to open to a second opening angle During the process, the first shaft moves to the locking section with the fifth shaft as the center.
  • the first switching element is closer to the first hinge element than the second switching element.
  • the first switching member includes the third shaft body, the second switching member has a through hole, and the third shaft body extends to the through hole through the through hole.
  • the third groove body, the second switching member includes the fourth shaft body, and the fourth shaft body extends to the fourth groove body.
  • the box body includes an opening and a front end surface arranged around the opening, and there is a first distance between the first shaft body and the front end surface. In the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a second distance between the third shaft body and the front end surface, and the second distance is greater than the first distance.
  • the refrigerator further includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and there is a third distance between the first shaft body and the outer side surface, when When the door is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a fourth distance between the third shaft and the outer side surface, and the fourth distance is smaller than the third distance .
  • the beneficial effect of the present invention is that the refrigerator according to an embodiment of the present invention can increase the degree of freedom of opening and closing the door body, and can generate a variety of motion tracks to adapt to different application scenarios.
  • Fig. 1 is a perspective view of a refrigerator according to a first embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is a first perspective view of the hinge assembly in the closed state of the first embodiment of the present invention
  • 3 to 5 are exploded views of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention in different states from a first perspective;
  • Fig. 6 is a second perspective perspective view of the hinge assembly in the closed state of the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figures 7 to 9 are exploded views of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention in different states from a second perspective;
  • Figure 10 is a top view of the refrigerator in the first embodiment of the present invention in a closed state
  • Figure 11 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention in a closed state
  • Figure 12 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention in a closed state
  • Figure 13 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly in the closed state of the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a top view of the refrigerator in the first embodiment of the present invention at a first intermediate opening angle
  • FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first intermediate opening angle
  • 16 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first intermediate opening angle
  • Figure 17 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first intermediate opening angle
  • FIG. 18 is a top view of the refrigerator in the first embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • FIG. 20 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • Figure 21 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • Figure 22 is a top view of the refrigerator in the first embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • Figure 23 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • 24 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • 25 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • Figure 26 is a top view of the refrigerator in the first embodiment of the present invention at a maximum opening angle
  • Figure 27 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a maximum opening angle
  • FIG. 28 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a maximum opening angle
  • Figure 29 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a maximum opening angle
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram of a fully embedded state of the refrigerator according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • 31 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly under the door body of the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 32 is an exploded view of the hinge assembly under the door in the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 33 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention in a closed state
  • Figures 34 to 36 are exploded views of the hinge assembly in different states of the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • Fig. 37 is a top view of the refrigerator in a closed state according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 38 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention in a closed state
  • 39 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly in the closed state of the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 40 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly in the closed state of the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 41 is a top view of the refrigerator in the second embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • Figure 42 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • Figure 43 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • Figure 44 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • FIG. 45 is a top view of the refrigerator in the second embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • Figure 46 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • Fig. 47 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • Figure 48 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • Fig. 49 is a top view of the refrigerator in the second embodiment of the present invention at a second intermediate opening angle
  • Figure 50 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a second intermediate opening angle
  • Figure 51 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a second intermediate opening angle
  • FIG. 52 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a second intermediate opening angle
  • FIG. 53 is a top view of the refrigerator in the second embodiment of the present invention at a maximum opening angle
  • Figure 54 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a maximum opening angle
  • Figure 55 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at the maximum opening angle
  • Figure 56 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at the maximum opening angle
  • Fig. 57 is a top view of a refrigerator with a wiring module according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 58 is a partial enlarged view of a refrigerator with a wiring module in a three-dimensional state according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 59 is a partial enlarged view of a refrigerator with a wiring module in a top view state according to an embodiment of the present invention (corresponding to a closed state of the door);
  • Fig. 60 is a partial enlarged view (corresponding to an open state of the door) of a refrigerator with a wiring module according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the refrigerator 100 in conjunction with FIGS. 1 to 9, includes a box body 10, a door body 20 for opening and closing the box body 10, and a hinge assembly 30 connecting the box body 10 and the door body 20.
  • the box body 10 includes a receiving chamber S and a pivot side P connected to the hinge assembly 30.
  • the hinge assembly 30 includes a first hinge part 31, a second hinge part 32, and a switching assembly 40 connecting the first hinge part 31 and the second hinge part 32.
  • the first hinge member 31 first moves relative to the switch assembly 40, and then the second hinge member 32 moves relative to the switch assembly 40, wherein the hinge assembly 30 first drives the door body 20 from the pivoting side P toward The accommodating chamber S moves, and then the door body 20 is driven to move from the accommodating chamber S toward the pivoting side P, and then the door body 20 is driven to continue to rotate in place relative to the box body 10.
  • the in-situ rotation of the door body 20 relative to the box body 10 can effectively prevent the door body 20 from being unable to open normally due to the displacement of the door body 20 in a certain direction.
  • the door body 20 can be moved from the pivoting side P toward the accommodation chamber S. Avoid the door body 20 from interfering with the surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process. It is suitable for embedded cabinets or scenes where the refrigerator 100 has a small space.
  • the door body 20 moves from the accommodating chamber S to the pivoting side P.
  • the door body 20 can be kept as far away from the box body 10 as possible to ensure the opening of the box body 10, and avoid the problem that the drawers and shelves in the box body 10 cannot be opened due to the interference of the door body 20, and the door body 20 is opposite to the box body. 10 Continue to turn to further increase the maximum opening angle of the door.
  • the switching between the first hinge part 31 and the second hinge part 32 can be realized by the switching assembly 33, and the first hinge part 31 and the second hinge part 32 can respectively realize in-situ rotation and rotation from the pivot side.
  • P moves toward the accommodation chamber S, moves from the accommodation chamber S to the pivoting side P, and continues to rotate part of the function.
  • the pivoting side P moves toward the accommodation chamber S and is moved by the accommodation chamber S. The movement of the chamber S toward the pivoting side P and the continued rotation in place are completed one by one in order.
  • the first hinge part 31 is fixed to the box body 10
  • the second hinge part 32 is fixed to the door body 20
  • the switching assembly 40 includes a first matching part 41 and a second matching part 42, the first hinge part 31 and The second hinge member 32 has various combinations.
  • the first hinge member 31 and the first matching member 41 move relative to each other to drive the door body 20 from the pivoting side. P moves toward the accommodating chamber S, and then the first hinge member 31 and the first matching member 41 move relatively to drive the door 20 to move from the accommodating chamber S toward the pivot side P, and the second matching member 42 limits the second hinge A member 32, when the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle ⁇ 1 to the second opening angle ⁇ 2, the second hinge member 32 is separated from the limit of the second matching member 42, and the first matching member 41 is limited
  • the first hinge part 31 of this example cooperates with the first matching part 41 to sequentially realize the movement of the door body 20 from the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S and the door body 20 from the accommodating chamber S toward the pivoting side P.
  • the second hinge member 32 cooperates with the second matching member 42 to realize that the door body 20 continues to rotate in situ.
  • the switch assembly 40 can realize that the first hinge member 31 works first and the second hinge member 32 follows through the locking and unlocking function. jobs.
  • the first hinge member 31 and the first matching member 41 move relative to each other to drive the door body 20 from the pivoting side. P moves toward the accommodating chamber S, and the second matching member 42 limits the second hinge member 32.
  • the second hinge member 32 is disengaged from the limit of the second matching member 42, and the first matching member 41 limits the first hinge member 31.
  • the second The hinge member 32 and the second matching member 42 move relative to each other to drive the door body 20 to move from the accommodating chamber S toward the pivot side P, and then the second hinge member 32 and the second matching member 42 move relative to each other to drive the door body 20 to continue in place Rotate.
  • the first hinge part 31 of this example cooperates with the first matching part 41 to sequentially realize the movement of the door body 20 from the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S, and the second hinge part 32 cooperates with the second matching part 42.
  • the door body 20 moves from the accommodating chamber S toward the pivoting side P and the door body 20 continues to rotate in situ.
  • the switching assembly 40 can realize the first hinge member 31 to work first and the second hinge member 32 through the lock and unlock function. After work.
  • the refrigerator 100 of the present invention is described in detail by taking the first combination manner as the first embodiment, and the refrigerator 100 is a multi-door refrigerator 100 as an example.
  • FIG. 1 it is a schematic diagram of a refrigerator 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the refrigerator 100 includes a box body 10, a door body 20 for opening and closing the box body 10, and a hinge assembly 30 connecting the box body 10 and the door body 20.
  • the structure of this embodiment is not only applicable to the side-by-side refrigerator 100 with the hinge assembly 30, but also applicable to other scenes, such as cabinets, wine cabinets, wardrobes, etc., the present invention takes the side-by-side refrigerator 100 as an example For illustration, but not limited to this.
  • the box body 10 includes a receiving chamber S and a pivot side P connected to the hinge assembly 30.
  • the “pivoting side P” is defined as the area where the door body 20 rotates relative to the box body 10, that is, the area where the hinge assembly 30 is provided.
  • the direction of the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S is defined as the first direction X
  • the accommodating cavity The direction of the chamber S toward the pivoting side P is defined as the second direction Y.
  • the hinge assembly 30 includes a first hinge member 31 fixed to the box body 10, a second hinge member 32 fixed to the door body 20, and a switching assembly connecting the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32 40.
  • the first hinge member 31 and the switching assembly 40 realize relative movement through the first shaft body groups 311, 312 and the first groove body groups 411, 412 that cooperate with each other, and the first shaft body groups 311 and 312 include the first shaft body 311 And the second shaft 312, the first slot group 411, 412 includes a first free section S1, a second free section S2, and a locking section 4132, 4142, 4152, 4162, the first free section S1 includes an initial position that is relatively set A1 and the stop position A2, the second free section S2 includes the first section L1 and the second section L2 that are connected.
  • the second hinge member 32 and the switching assembly 40 realize relative movement through the mutually matched second shaft groups 321, 322 and the second groove body groups 421, 422.
  • the second shaft groups 321, 322 include the third shaft body 321.
  • the fourth shaft 322, the second slot group 421, 422 includes a third free section 421, a fourth free section 4221, and a limiting section 4222.
  • the first shaft 311 is located at the initial position A1
  • the second shaft 312 is located at the end of the first section L1 away from the second section L2
  • the fourth shaft The body 322 is located in the limiting section 4222 so that the switching assembly 40 limits the second hinge member 32.
  • the second shaft 312 moves in the first section L1 to drive the first shaft 311 from the initial The position A1 moves to the stop position A2, the door 20 moves from the pivoting side P toward the containing chamber S, and then the second shaft 312 moves in the second section L2 to drive the first shaft 311 from the stop position A2 to the initial position A1 moves, and the door body 20 moves from the accommodating chamber S toward the pivoting side P.
  • the second shaft body 312 moves in the first section L1 to drive the first shaft
  • the body 311 moves from the initial position A1 to the stop position A2, and the door body 20 moves from the pivoting side P toward the accommodation chamber S.
  • the door body 20 when the door body 20 is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first intermediate opening angle ⁇ 11, the door body 20 moves toward the side of the accommodating chamber S, that is, at this time, the door body 20 both rotates relative to the box body 10 and The relative box body 10 is displaced in the first direction X.
  • the distance that the door body 20 protrudes from the box body 10 toward the side away from the containing chamber S during the rotation process will be greatly reduced, that is, the door body 20 is along the first direction.
  • the displacement produced in one direction X offsets the part that protrudes from the box body 10 in the second direction Y during the rotation of the door body 20, thereby avoiding the door body 20 from interfering with the surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process, and is suitable for Built-in cabinets or a scene where the space for accommodating the refrigerator 100 is small.
  • the second shaft body 312 moves in the second section L2 to drive the first shaft
  • the body 311 moves from the stop position A2 toward the initial position A1, and the door body 20 moves from the accommodating chamber S toward the pivot side P.
  • the door body 20 when the door body 20 is in the process of opening from the first intermediate opening angle ⁇ 11 to the first opening angle ⁇ 1, the door body 20 moves toward the side of the pivoting side P, that is, the door body 20 is opposite to the box body 10 at this time. When the rotation occurs, it is displaced in the second direction Y relative to the box body 10. In this way, the door body 20 can be kept as far away from the box body 10 as possible to ensure the opening of the box body 10 and avoid the drawers, shelves, etc. in the box body 10 from being affected. The door body 20 interferes and cannot be opened.
  • the fourth shaft body 322 is separated from the limiting section 4222, and the first shaft body 311 And/or the second shaft body 312 is confined to the locking segments 4132, 4142, 4152, 4162, so that the switching assembly 40 constrains the first hinge member 31.
  • the third shaft body 321 rotates in situ in the third free section 421, and the fourth shaft The body 322 moves in the fourth free section 4221 with the third shaft body 321 as the center, and the door body 20 continues to rotate in situ relative to the box body 10.
  • the first hinge member 31 includes a first shaft body 311 and a second shaft body 322, and the switching assembly 40 includes a first groove body 411 having a first free section S1, and a second free section S2.
  • the first matching member 41 and the second matching member 42 are specifically a first switching member 401 and a second switching member 402 that cooperate with each other, that is, the switching assembly 40 includes a first switching member 401 and a second switching member 401 that cooperate with each other.
  • the switch 402 is not limited to this.
  • the first tank 411 includes a first upper tank 413 located on the first switching member 401 and a first lower tank 414 located on the second switching member 402.
  • the first free section S1 includes a first upper tank 413 located on the first upper tank 413.
  • the second tank 412 includes a second upper tank 415 located in the first switching member 401 and a second lower tank 416 located in the second switching member 402, and the second free section S2 includes a second upper tank 415 located in the second upper tank 415.
  • the locking section 4132, 4142, 4152, 4162 includes a first upper locking section 4132 connected to the first upper free section 4131, a first lower locking section 4142 connected to the first lower free section 4141, and a second upper free section 4151 The second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section 4162 communicating with the second lower free section 4161.
  • the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142 are always staggered from each other, and the second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section 4162 are always staggered from each other.
  • the first switching element 401 is closer to the first hinge element 31 than the second switching element 402, that is, the first hinge element 31, the first switching element 401, the second switching element 402, and the second hinge element 32 Stacked in turn.
  • the hinge assembly 30 further includes a first riveting piece 4111 and a second riveting piece 4121.
  • first riveting piece 4111 When the first shaft body 311 extends into the first groove body 411, the first riveting piece 4111 is located at the second switching member The first shaft body 311 is sleeved under 402, so that the first shaft body 311 can be prevented from detaching from the first groove body 411.
  • second riveting piece The 4121 is located under the second switching member 402 and is sleeved with the second shaft 312, so that the second shaft 312 can be prevented from being separated from the second groove 412.
  • the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are mated with each other through the fifth shaft body 50.
  • first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are provided with a first through hole 4014 and a second through hole 4024, and an independent riveting element as a fifth shaft 50 passes through the first through hole 4014 and the second through hole 4024.
  • the fifth shaft body 50 includes a riveting post 51 and a riveting post washer 52.
  • the end of the riveting post 51 with a larger size is located below the second through hole 4024, and the end of the riveting post 51 with a smaller size extends to the first through hole 4024 in turn.
  • the riveting post gasket 52 is located above the first through hole 4014 and cooperates with the riveting post 51 to lock the riveting post 51.
  • the mutual mating of the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 can be realized, and the relative movement of the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 can be realized, and the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 can be realized. Will not be separated from each other.
  • first through hole 4014 and the second through hole 4024 are matched with the fifth shaft body 50, and the first switching member 401 rotates in situ relative to the second switching member 402.
  • a through hole may be provided on one of the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402, and a fifth shaft 50 is provided on the other, and the fifth shaft 50 is matched with the through hole.
  • the mutual mating of the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 is realized, but not limited to this.
  • the first switching member 401 includes a third shaft body 321
  • the second switching member 402 has a through hole 4026
  • the third shaft body 321 extends to the third groove body 421 through the through hole 4026
  • the second switching member 402 includes a fourth The shaft 322, and the fourth shaft 322 extends to the fourth slot 422.
  • the size of the through hole 4026 may be larger than the size of the third shaft body 321. In this way, the third shaft body 321 can be moved in the through hole 4026. When the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402 move relative to each other, Avoid mutual interference between the through hole 4026 and the third shaft body 321.
  • the third shaft body 321 and the fourth shaft body 322 of this embodiment are located in different switching elements, but not limited to this.
  • the first switching member 401 includes a first lining 4011, a first sliding plate 4012, and a first bushing 4013 that are sequentially stacked
  • the second switching member 402 includes sequentially stacked The second lining 4021, the second sliding piece 4022, and the second bushing 4023.
  • first hinge member 31, the first lining 4011, the first sliding piece 4012, the first bushing 4013, the second lining 4021, the second sliding piece 4022, the second bushing 4023, and the second hinge member 32 are composed of Stacked one by one from top to bottom.
  • the first liner 4011, the first liner 4013, the second liner 4021, and the second liner 4023 are made of plastic material, such as polyformaldehyde (POM).
  • POM polyformaldehyde
  • the first sliding piece 4012 and the second sliding piece 4022 are made of metal, such as stainless steel or Q235 steel.
  • the outer contours of the first lining 4011, the first sliding piece 4012, and the first bushing 4013 match each other.
  • the first lining 4011 and the first bushing 4013 cooperate with each other to sandwich the first sliding piece 4012 between the two ,
  • the first lining 4011, the first sliding piece 4012, and the first bushing 4013 all need to be provided with slots to cooperate to form the first upper groove 413, the second upper groove 415, and the first through hole 4014.
  • the first through hole 4014 may be formed by only forming slots on the first sliding piece 4012 and the first bushing 4013, that is, the first through hole 4014 does not penetrate the first lining piece 4011, at this time, the fifth shaft body 50 It extends from below the first switching member 401 to the first through hole 4011, and the first lining 4011 can shield the first through hole 4014 and the fifth shaft 50 to improve the aesthetics.
  • the outer contours of the second lining 4021, the second sliding piece 4022, and the second bushing 4023 match each other, and the second lining 4021 and the second bushing 4023 cooperate with each other to sandwich the second sliding piece 4022 between the two , And the second lining 4021, the second sliding piece 4022 and the second bushing 4023 all need to be provided with slots to cooperate to form the first lower groove body 414, the second lower groove body 416 and the second through hole 4024.
  • the second through hole 4024 may be formed by only forming slots on the second lining 4021 and the second sliding piece 4022, that is, the second through hole 4024 does not penetrate the second bushing 4023.
  • the fifth shaft body 50 It extends from below the second bush 4023 to the second through hole 4024 and the first through hole 4011, and the second bush 4023 can shield the second through hole 4024 and the fifth shaft 50 to improve the aesthetics.
  • one end of the riveting column 51 of the fifth shaft body 50 can be limited to the second bushing 4023 to further improve the matching effect of the second bushing 4021, the second sliding piece 4022 and the second bushing 4023.
  • the first switching element 401 further includes a first decorative sheet 4015 covering the periphery of the first lining 4011, the first sliding sheet 4012, and the first bushing 4013
  • the second switching element 402 further includes covering the first lining 4011.
  • the two lining pieces 4021, the second sliding piece 4022, and the second decoration piece 4025 on the periphery of the second bushing 4023, the first decoration piece 4015 and the second decoration piece 4025 are separated from each other.
  • first decorative piece 4015 and the second decorative piece 4025 will also move relative to each other.
  • the first decorative sheet 4015 of this embodiment is in the shape of a "door", that is, the first decorative sheet 4015 only covers the three sides of the first switching member 401, which facilitates the assembly of the first decorative sheet 4015 and can be installed here.
  • the three sides are provided with buckle structures to achieve the cooperation with the first decorative sheet 4015.
  • the width of the first decorative sheet 4015 is approximately equal to the first lining 4011 , The sum of the thickness of the first sliding piece 4012 and the first bushing 4013.
  • the second decorative sheet 4025 is in the shape of a "door", that is, the second decorative sheet 4025 only covers the three sides of the second switching member 402, which facilitates the assembly of the second decorative sheet 4025 and can be installed on these three sides.
  • a buckle structure is provided at the position to achieve the cooperation with the second decorative sheet 4025.
  • the width of the second decorative sheet 4025 is approximately equal to the second lining 4021 and the second The sum of the thickness of the sliding piece 4022 and the second bushing 4023.
  • the first decorative sheet 4015 and the second decorative sheet 4025 may be made of ABS (Acrylonitrile Butdiene Styrene) plastic.
  • the box body 10 includes an outer side surface 13 adjacent to the hinge assembly 30 and on the extension section of the rotation path of the door body 20.
  • the door body 20 includes a front wall 21 away from the containing chamber S and is always sandwiched on the front wall 21
  • the side wall 22 between the accommodating chamber S and the front wall 21 has a side edge 23 between the front wall 21 and the side wall 22.
  • the outer side surface 13 and the side wall 22 are located on the same plane, which can ensure the smoothness of the appearance, improve the aesthetics, and also facilitate the installation of the door body 20, but it is not limited to this.
  • the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402 are relatively stationary, and the first upper free section 4131 and the first upper free section 4131 are relatively static.
  • the lower free section 4141 overlaps to form the first free section S1.
  • the second upper free section 4151 and the second lower free section 4161 overlap to form the second free section S2.
  • the second shaft 312 moves in the first section L1 to drive the first free section S1.
  • the shaft body 311 moves from the initial position A1 to the stop position A2, and the door body 20 moves from the pivoting side P toward the containing chamber S.
  • the side edge 23 moves to the side of the outer side surface 13 close to the receiving chamber S, that is, at this time, the hinge assembly 30 drives the side edge 23 to move to the side close to the receiving chamber S, and the door 20 is opened during the opening process. In this way, it is possible to avoid interference with surrounding cabinets or walls due to the side ribs 23 protruding from the outer side surface 13.
  • the side ribs 23 are moved to the side close to the accommodating chamber S to the outside.
  • the hinge assembly 30 drives the side edge 23 to move in the plane and gradually approach the containing chamber S.
  • the side edge 23 is made as close to the outer side surface 13 as possible.
  • the door body 20 can be prevented from contacting the surrounding cabinets during the opening process. Or interference is caused by the wall, etc., and the opening of the box 10 can be ensured as much as possible.
  • the side edge 23 moves in the plane of the outer side surface 13 and gradually approaches the containing chamber S.
  • the hinge assembly 30 of this embodiment drives the side edges 24 to move in the plane where the outer side surface 13 is located, that is, the door body 20 can be kept as far away from the box body 10 as possible to ensure the opening of the box body 10 and avoid drawers and shelves in the box body 10.
  • the problem that the object shelf and the like cannot be opened due to the interference of the door body 20 can also avoid the side edge 23 protruding out of the outer surface 13 in a direction away from the containing chamber S.
  • the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 will never be staggered with each other, that is, the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 remain relatively stationary, which can avoid the first upper free section 4131 and the first lower free section 4141 are mutually misaligned, and at the same time, the second upper free section 4151 and the second lower free section 4161 are prevented from displacing each other. In this way, the smooth movement of the first shaft body 311 in the first free section S1 can be ensured, and the second shaft body 312 is free in the second free section. Section S2 moves smoothly.
  • the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402 move relative to each other so that the second hinge member 32 is disengaged from the limit of the switching assembly 40, and the first shaft body 311 and/or the second shaft body 312 are limited to the locking section 4132, 4142, 4152, 4162 and the switch assembly 40 to limit the first hinge member 31
  • first shaft body 311 is confined to the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142 at the same time
  • second shaft body 312 is confined to the second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section at the same time.
  • the stop section 4162, and the fourth shaft body 322 departs from the fourth limit section 4222, the description is as follows:
  • the second shaft 312 moves from the second free section S2 to the second lower locking section 4162 and is limited.
  • the first shaft 311 and the second shaft 312 Can no longer move relative to the first free section S1 and the second free section S2, and at this time, the first shaft body 311 is adjacent to the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142, and the second shaft body 312 is adjacent to the second
  • the trajectories of the upper locking section 4152, the first upper locking section 4132 and the second upper locking section 4152 are adapted to the movement paths of the first shaft body 311 and the second shaft body 312.
  • the door body 20 drives the second hinge member 32 connected to the door body 20 to move, and the second hinge member 32 passes through the third free section 4211 and the fourth limit section At 4222, a force is applied to the third shaft 321 and the fourth shaft 322, and then the third shaft 321 and the fourth shaft 322 drive the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 to move.
  • the first shaft body 311 is adjacent to the first upper locking section 4132
  • the second shaft body 312 is adjacent to the second upper locking section 4152
  • the first switching member 401 can be opposed to the first shaft body 311 and the second shaft body.
  • 312 moves by a first angle until the first shaft body 311 is confined to the first upper locking section 4132
  • the second shaft body 312 is confined to the second upper locking section 4152
  • the second switching member 402 is positioned at the fifth shaft body 50 is the center of the circle and moves a second angle relative to the first shaft body 311 until the first shaft body 311 is confined within the second upper locking section 4152.
  • the second shaft body 312 and the second lower locking section 4162 Always touch, the second angle is greater than the first angle.
  • both the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 will rotate at a certain angle, and the rotation angle of the second switching element 402 is greater than the rotation angle of the first switching element 401, the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 401 Relative movement will also occur between 402 and they will be staggered with each other.
  • the rotation process of the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 does not have a certain sequence, and the two can be rotated at the same time.
  • the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are in a certain sequence. Synchronously rotate within the range of the rotation angle, and then the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are staggered with each other.
  • first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 drive the first groove body 411 and the second groove body 412 to rotate relative to the first shaft body 311 and the second shaft body 312, respectively, and the first shaft body 311 separates from the first shaft body 311 and the second shaft body 312.
  • the free section S1 abuts the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142, that is, the first shaft body 311 is confined to the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142 at the same time, and the second The shaft 312 is separated from the second free section S2 and abuts against the second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section 4162, that is, the second shaft 312 is confined to the second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section at the same time.
  • the movement of the second switching member 402 causes the fourth shaft 322 to escape from the fourth limiting section 4222.
  • first shaft body 311 when the first shaft body 311 is located at the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142, since the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are mutually staggered, they are originally overlapped with each other.
  • the first upper free section 4131 and the first lower free section 4141 will also be staggered.
  • the first upper free section 4131 and the first lower free section 4141 are mutually staggered to restrict the first shaft body 311 from being separated from the first upper locking section 4132.
  • the first lower locking section 4142 can ensure that the first shaft body 311 is always maintained at the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142 while the door body 20 continues to be opened.
  • the staggered second upper free section 4151 and the second lower free section 4161 restrict the second shaft 312 from separating from the second upper locking section 4152 and The second lower locking section 4162 can ensure that the second shaft 312 remains at the second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section 4162 while the door 20 continues to be opened.
  • the rotation angle of the second switching element 402 is greater than the rotation angle of the first switching element 401, that is, the second switching element 402 and the first switching element 401 are staggered with each other, which can further improve the relationship between the first hinge element 31 and the switching assembly 40.
  • the locking effect ensures that the first shaft 311 is always maintained at the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142, and the second shaft 312 is always maintained at the second upper locking section 4152 and the first lower locking section 4142.
  • the second locking section is at 4162.
  • the distance between the third shaft 321 on the first switching element 401 and the fourth shaft 322 on the second switching element 402 occurs.
  • the third shaft body 321 is always located in the third free section 4211, and the fourth shaft body 322 moves from the fourth limit section 4222 to the fourth free section 4221, that is, the fourth shaft body 322 departs from the fourth limit section 4222 .
  • the first upper locking section 4132 is the part of the first upper free section 4131 close to the initial position A1.
  • the first shaft body 311 moves from the stop position A2 to the initial position A1 without reaching the initial position A1.
  • the first shaft body 311 moves to the initial position A1 (that is, move to the first upper locking section 4132), and at the same time, the second shaft 312 moves to the first lower locking section 4142. In this process, the door body 20 substantially continues to move from the receiving chamber S to the pivoting side P movement.
  • the range of the first opening angle ⁇ 1 is approximately 80°-83°
  • the second opening angle ⁇ 2 is approximately 90°
  • the maximum opening angle ⁇ 3 is greater than 90°, that is, the door body 20 is opened to 80°-83°
  • the door body 20 first displaces in the first direction X to prevent the door body 20 from interfering with the surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process, and the rear door body 20 displaces in the second direction Y to avoid the door body 20
  • the body 20 hinders the opening of the drawers, shelves, etc. in the box body 10, and finally reaches 80° ⁇ 83°.
  • the switch assembly 40 moves while the door body 20 continues to open to 90°, so that the door body 20 is moved.
  • the replacement of the rotating shaft continues to rotate, that is, after 90°, the door body 20 continues to rotate in situ relative to the box body 10 with the third shaft body 321 as the rotating shaft to further open the door body 20.
  • this embodiment can effectively control the sequence switching of the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32 through the unlocking and locking effects of the switching assembly 40 on the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32, so that the door The body 20 can be stably opened.
  • the switching assembly 40 can also effectively control the sequence switching of the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32, namely When the door body 20 is in the process of closing from the maximum opening angle ⁇ 3 to the second opening angle ⁇ 2, the third shaft body 321 moves in the third free section 4211, the fourth shaft body 322 moves in the fourth free section 4221, and switches The assembly 40 locks the first hinge member 31.
  • the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402 move relative to each other so that the first The hinge member 31 is disengaged from the limit of the switching assembly 40, and the fourth shaft 322 is limited in the fourth limit section 4222.
  • the switching assembly 40 locks the second hinge member 32.
  • the closing process of the door body 20 and the opening process of the door body 20 are in the opposite sequence.
  • the unlocking and locking effects of the switching assembly 40 on the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32 can effectively control the door.
  • the center of the first shaft body 311 and the side edges 23 are at a first distance
  • the center of the first shaft body 311 and the front wall 21 are at a second distance
  • the center of the first shaft body 311 is
  • the side walls 22 are at a third distance
  • the center of the third shaft 312 and the side edges 23 are at a fourth distance
  • the center of the third shaft 312 and the front wall 21 are at a fifth distance
  • the third shaft is at a fifth distance.
  • the first shaft body 311 and the third shaft body 321 are staggered from each other, so that it can be applied to a scene where a built-in cabinet or a refrigerator 100 has a small space.
  • a simple schematic diagram of the refrigerator 100 embedded in the cabinet 200 is taken as an example for description.
  • the box body 10 includes an opening 102 and a front end surface 103 arranged around the opening 102.
  • the box body 10 also includes a receiving chamber S and an outer side surface 13 adjacent to the hinge assembly 30 and on the extension of the rotation path of the door body 20.
  • the door body 20 includes a front wall 21 away from the containing chamber S and a side wall 22 always sandwiched between the front wall 21 and the containing chamber S.
  • a side edge 23 is provided between the front wall 21 and the side wall 22.
  • the door body 20 when the door body 20 is in the closed state and is opened to the first opening angle ⁇ 1, the door body 20 rotates about the first shaft body 311, and there is a first distance between the first shaft body 311 and the front end surface 103,
  • the door body 20 When the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle ⁇ 2 to the maximum opening angle ⁇ 3, the door body 20 rotates around the third shaft body 321, and there is a second shaft between the third shaft body 321 and the front end surface 103.
  • the second distance is greater than the first distance. In this way, the maximum opening angle of the fully built-in refrigerator 100 can be greatly increased.
  • the door body 20 moves relative to the door body 20 with the first shaft body 311 and the third shaft body 321 as axes in sequence.
  • the hinge assembly 30 further includes a second shaft body 312 matching the first shaft body 311 and a fourth shaft body 322 matching the third shaft body 321.
  • the door body 20 simply regard the door body 20 as the first
  • the one shaft body 311 is used as the axis to rotate, and then the switching assembly 40 is switched to use the third shaft body 321 as the axis to rotate.
  • the refrigerator 100 is a freely embedded refrigerator, that is, the front end 201 of the cabinet 200 and the front wall 21 of the door 20 away from the cabinet 10 It is located on the same plane, or the front wall 21 of the door body 20 does not protrude from the front end 201 of the cabinet 200 at all.
  • all refrigerators are single-axis refrigerators, and a certain distance must be maintained between the rotation axis of the refrigerator and the side wall and front wall of the refrigerator. In this way, there can be enough space to satisfy foaming or other processes.
  • the position of the rotation axis of the refrigerator is roughly at the position of the first shaft 311 in FIG. 30.
  • the cabinet 200 is sandwiched between the front end 201 and the inner wall 202.
  • 203 is arranged corresponding to the side edge 23 of the door body 20. When the door body 20 is opened, the side edge 23 will interfere with the door body 20 to limit the maximum opening angle of the door body 20.
  • the prior art In order to ensure the normal opening of the door body 20, the prior art The usual method is to increase the gap between the inner wall 202 of the cabinet 200 and the refrigerator 100.
  • the gap roughly needs to be about 10 cm, which will seriously affect the embedding effect and is not conducive to the rational use of the limited space.
  • the shaded area represents the door 20 in the closed state.
  • the door 20 When the door 20 is in the opening process, if the door 20 always rotates around the first shaft 311 (ie, prior art), refer to Figure 30 Dotted line door 20', because the first shaft 311 is close to the front end 103, that is, the first shaft 311 is away from the front end 201 of the cabinet 200 at this time.
  • the corners 203 of the cabinet 200 will change It interferes with the door body 20' to limit the maximum opening angle of the door body 20'.
  • the third shaft body 321 is located on the first switching member 401.
  • the switching assembly 40 moves relative to the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32 to make the third shaft body 321 gradually moves away from the front end surface 103, that is, the third shaft body 321 gradually moves toward the front end 201 of the cabinet 200, that is, at this time, the entire door body 20 moves away from the box body 10, refer to the solid line in FIG. 30
  • the interference effect of the door 20 and the corners 203 of the cabinet 200 on the door 20 is greatly reduced, and the corners 203 of the cabinet 200 will interfere with each other when the door 20 is opened to a larger angle, thereby greatly increasing the maximum opening angle of the door 20.
  • the switch assembly 40 can make the late door 20 rotate around the third shaft 321 as the axis, and the maximum opening of the door 20 can be effectively increased on the premise that the refrigerator 100 is freely inserted into the cabinet 200.
  • the angle thereby facilitating the user to operate the refrigerator 100, can greatly improve the user experience.
  • the switching assembly 40 of this embodiment drives the third shaft 321 to gradually move toward the front end 201 of the cabinet 200, it also drives the third shaft 321 to gradually approach the inner wall 202 of the cabinet 200, that is, when When the door body 20 rotates with the third shaft body 321 as the axis, the third shaft body 321 is closer to the front end 201 and the inner wall 202 of the cabinet 200 than the first shaft body 311 at this time. In this way, the door body 20 can be improved.
  • the maximum opening angle can make the door 20 far away from the box body 10 to increase the opening degree of the box body 10, which facilitates the opening and closing of shelves, drawers, etc. in the box body 10, or in other words, facilitates the picking and placing of items.
  • the third shaft body 321 ultimately serving as the rotating shaft can also be located in other positions.
  • the third shaft body 321 at this time is compared with the first shaft.
  • the body 311 is close to the front end 201 of the cabinet 200, and the third shaft 321 is farther away from the inner wall 202 of the cabinet 200 than the first shaft 311.
  • the switching assembly 40 controls the switching sequence of the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32 during the opening and closing of the door body 20, which can effectively prevent the door body 20 from interfering with the cabinet 200 during the opening and closing process.
  • the specific shaft groove design can effectively control the movement trajectory of the door 20.
  • the box 10 includes the pivot side P connected to the hinge assembly 30.
  • the hinge assembly 30 at least drives the door body 20 to move from the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S, so as to prevent the door body 20 from interfering with the surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process.
  • the specific design can refer to the following implementation.
  • the structure of the hinge assembly 30 located in different areas of the door body 20 will be different.
  • the above-mentioned hinge assembly 30 is the hinge assembly 30 located between the upper part of the door body 20 and the box body 10.
  • FIGS. 31 and 32 A brief introduction to the hinge assembly 30' located below the door body 20 and the box body 10.
  • the difference between the lower hinge assembly 30' and the upper hinge assembly 30 is that the first hinge part 31' of the lower hinge assembly 30' has a convex portion 313', and the second hinge part 32' has a corresponding hook 323',
  • the hook 323' is an elastic member.
  • the convex portion 313' acts on the hook 323' to deform to make the door body 20 and the box body 10 closely fit.
  • the door body 20 drives the hook 323' to move, and the hook 323' is deformed and detaches from the convex portion 313'.
  • the second hinge part 32' also includes an extension 324' that passes through the switching assembly 40' in the thickness direction,
  • the extension section 324' is connected to the hook 323', so that the hook 323' is arranged horizontally and can be matched with the convex portion 313'.
  • hinge assembly 30a of the present invention will be specifically described using the second combination mode as the second embodiment.
  • the same or similar components are given the same or similar numbers.
  • the hinge assembly 30a includes a first hinge part 31a fixed to the box body 10a, a second hinge part 32a fixed to the door body 20a, and a switching assembly connecting the first hinge part 31a and the second hinge part 32a 40a.
  • the first hinge part 31a and the switching assembly 40a realize relative movement through the first shaft group 311a, 312a and the first groove body group 411a, 412a that cooperate with each other.
  • the first shaft group 311a, 312a includes the first shaft body 311a.
  • the second shaft 312a includes the first slot group 411a, 412a.
  • the first slot group 411a, 412a includes a first free section S1, a second free section S2, and a locking section 4132a, 4142a, 4152a, 4162a.
  • the first free section S1 includes an initial position that is relatively set A1 and stop position A2.
  • the second hinge member 32a and the switching assembly 40a realize relative movement through the mutually matched second shaft body groups 321a, 322a and the second groove body groups 421a, 422a.
  • the second shaft body groups 321a, 322a include the third shaft body 321a.
  • the fourth shaft 322a, the second slot group 421a, 422a includes a third free section 421a, a fourth free section 4221a and a limiting section 4222a
  • the third free section 421a includes a relatively set starting position B1 and a pivoting position B2,
  • the fourth free section 4221a includes a connected moving section M1 and a rotating section M2.
  • the first hinge member 31a includes a first shaft body 311a and a second shaft body 322a
  • the switching assembly 40a includes a first groove body 411a having a first free section S1, and a second free section S2.
  • the second hinge member 32a includes a third groove body 421a with a third free section 421a and a fourth groove body 422a with a fourth free section 4221a.
  • the switching assembly 40a includes a first switching element 401a and a second switching element 402a that cooperate with each other.
  • the first slot body 411a includes a first upper slot body 413a located in the first switching member 401a and a first lower slot body 414a located in the second switching member 402a
  • the first free section S1 includes a first upper slot body 413a located in the first upper slot body 413a.
  • the second tank 412a includes a second upper tank 415a located in the first switching member 401a and a second lower tank 416a located in the second switching member 402a, and the second free section S2 includes a second upper tank 415a located in the second upper tank 415a.
  • the locking sections 4132a, 4142a, 4152a, 4162a include a first upper locking section 4132a communicating with the first upper free section 4131a, a first lower locking section 4142a communicating with the first lower free section 4141a, and a second upper free section 4151a communicating The second upper locking section 4152a and the second lower locking section 4162a communicating with the second lower free section 4161a.
  • the first upper locking section 4132a and the first lower locking section 4142a are always staggered from each other, and the second upper locking section 4152a and the second lower locking section 4162a are always staggered from each other.
  • the first switching element 401a is closer to the first hinge element 31a than the second switching element 402a, that is, the first hinge element 31a, the first switching element 401a, the second switching element 402a, and the second hinge element 32a Stacked in turn.
  • the hinge assembly 30a further includes a first riveting piece 4111a, a second riveting piece 4121a, a fifth shaft body 50a (including a riveting post 51a and a riveting post gasket 52a), a first through hole 4014a, and a second through hole 4024a ,
  • the first switching member 401a includes a first lining 4011a, a first sliding plate 4012a, and a first bushing 4013a that are sequentially stacked
  • the second switching member 402a includes a second lining 4021a, a first Two sliding pieces 4022a and a second bushing 4023a.
  • the first switching member 401a also includes a first decorative piece 4015a covering the peripheries of the first sliding piece 4011a, the first sliding piece 4012a and the first bushing 4013a, and the second switching piece 402a It also includes a second decorative sheet 4025a covering the periphery of the second lining 4021a, the second sliding sheet 4022a, and the second bushing 4023a.
  • the specific description of these components of the hinge assembly 30a can refer to the description of the first embodiment. No longer.
  • the box body 10a includes an outer side surface 13a adjacent to the hinge assembly 30a and on the extension section of the rotation path of the door body 20a.
  • the door body 20a includes a front wall 21a away from the containing chamber S and always sandwiched on the front wall 21a.
  • the side wall 22a between the accommodating chamber S and the front wall 21a has a side edge 23a between the front wall 21a and the side wall 22a.
  • the first switching member 401a and the second switching member 402a are relatively stationary, and the first upper free section 4131a and the first lower free section 4141a overlap to form a first free section S1 ,
  • the second upper free section 4151a and the second lower free section 4161a overlap to form a second free section S2
  • the first shaft body 311a is located at the initial position A1
  • the second shaft body 312a is located at one end of the second free section S2.
  • the outer side surface 13a and the side wall 22a are located on the same plane, which can ensure the smoothness of the appearance, improve the aesthetics, and also facilitate the installation of the door body 20a, but it is not limited to this.
  • the first switching member 401a and the second switching member 402a are relatively stationary, and the first upper free section 4131a and the first The lower free section 4141a overlaps to form a first free section S1.
  • the second upper free section 4151a and the second lower free section 4161a overlap to form a second free section S2.
  • the second shaft 312a moves in the second free section S2 to drive the first free section S2.
  • the shaft body 311a moves from the initial position A1 to the stop position A2, and the door body 20a moves from the pivoting side P toward the accommodation chamber S.
  • the hinge assembly 30a drives the side edge 23a to move toward the side close to the accommodating chamber S, and the door body 20a is opened during the opening process. In this way, it is possible to avoid interference with surrounding cabinets or walls due to the side ribs 23a protruding from the outer surface 13a.
  • the side ribs 23a move to the side close to the accommodating chamber S to the outside.
  • the hinge assembly 30a drives the side edge 23a to move in the plane and gradually approach the containing chamber S.
  • the side rib 23a is made as close to the outer side 13a as possible. In this way, it is possible to prevent the door body 20a from contacting the surrounding cabinets during the opening process. Or the wall may interfere, and the opening of the box 10a can be ensured as much as possible.
  • the fourth shaft body 322a is always limited at the limiting section 4222a so that the switching assembly 40a limits the second hinge member 32a.
  • the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a will not be staggered with each other, that is, the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a remain relatively static, which can avoid the first upper free section 4131a and the first lower free section 4141a is misaligned with each other, and at the same time, the second upper free section 4151a and the second lower free section 4161a are prevented from misaligning each other. In this way, it can be ensured that the first shaft body 311a moves smoothly in the first free section S1, and the second shaft body 312a is free in the second free section. Section S2 moves smoothly.
  • the first switching member 401a and the second switching member 402a move relative to each other to make the fourth shaft body 322a is separated from the limiting section 4222a, and the first shaft body 311a and/or the second shaft body 312a is limited to the locking sections 4132a, 4142a, 4152a, 4162a, so that the switching assembly 40a limits the first hinge member 31a.
  • the relative movement of the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a causes the second hinge element 32a to escape the limit of the switching assembly 40a, and the first shaft body 311a and/or the second shaft body 312a are limited to the locking section 4132a, 4142a, 4152a, 4162a so that the switch assembly 40a limits the first hinge part 31a
  • the relative movement between the switching assembly 40a and the first hinge part 31a causes the switching assembly 40a and the first hinge part 31a to limit each other.
  • first shaft body 311a is confined to the first upper locking section 4132a and the first lower locking section 4142a at the same time
  • second shaft body 312a is confined to the second upper locking section 4152a and the second lower locking section at the same time.
  • the stop section 4162a, and the fourth shaft body 322a is separated from the fourth limit section 4222a, the description is as follows:
  • the second shaft body 312a moves from the second free section S2 to the second lower locking section 4162a and is restricted.
  • the first shaft body 311a and the second shaft body 312a Can no longer move relative to the first free section S1 and the second free section S2, and at this time, the first shaft body 311a is adjacent to the first upper locking section 4132a and the first lower locking section 4142a, and the second shaft body 312a is adjacent to the second
  • the trajectories of the upper locking section 4152a, the first upper locking section 4132a and the second upper locking section 4152a are adapted to the movement paths of the first shaft body 311a and the second shaft body 312a.
  • the door body 20a drives the second hinge member 32a connected to the door body 20a to move, and the second hinge member 32a passes through the third free section 4211a and the fourth limit section 4222a applies force to the third shaft 321a and the fourth shaft 322a, and then the third shaft 321a and the fourth shaft 322a drive the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a to move.
  • the first shaft body 311a is adjacent to the first upper locking section 4132a
  • the second shaft body 312a is adjacent to the second upper locking section 4152a
  • the first switching member 401a can be opposed to the first shaft body 311a and the second shaft body.
  • 312a moves at a first angle until the first shaft body 311a is confined to the first upper locking section 4132a
  • the second shaft body 312a is confined to the second upper locking section 4152a
  • the second switching member 402a uses the fifth shaft body 50a is the center of the circle and moves a second angle relative to the first shaft 311a until the first shaft 311a is confined within the second locking section 4152a.
  • the second shaft 312a and the second lower locking section 4162a are always Contact, the second angle is greater than the first angle.
  • both the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a will rotate at a certain angle, and the rotation angle of the second switching element 402a is greater than the rotation angle of the first switching element 401a, the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 401a 402a will also move relative to each other and stagger each other.
  • the rotation process of the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a does not have a certain sequence, and the two can be rotated at the same time.
  • the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a are in a certain Synchronously rotate within the range of the rotation angle, and then the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a are staggered from each other.
  • the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a drive the first groove body 411a and the second groove body 412a to rotate relative to the first shaft body 311a and the second shaft body 312a, respectively, and the first shaft body 311a separates from the first shaft body 311a.
  • the free section S1 is in contact with the first upper locking section 4132a and the first lower locking section 4142a, that is, the first shaft body 311a is confined to the first upper locking section 4132a and the first lower locking section 4142a at the same time, and the second The shaft 312a is separated from the second free section S2 and abuts on the second upper locking section 4152a and the second lower locking section 4162a, that is, the second shaft 312a is confined to the second upper locking section 4152a and the second lower locking section at the same time.
  • the movement of the second switching member 402a causes the fourth shaft 322a to escape from the fourth limiting section 4222a.
  • the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a are mutually staggered, and originally overlapped with each other.
  • the first upper free section 4131a and the first lower free section 4141a will also be staggered.
  • the first upper free section 4131a and the first lower free section 4141a are mutually staggered to restrict the first shaft body 311a from leaving the first upper locking section 4132a.
  • the first lower locking section 4142a can ensure that the first shaft body 311a is always maintained at the first upper locking section 4132a and the first lower locking section 4142a while the door body 20a continues to be opened.
  • the second shaft 312a is located at the second upper locking section 4152a and the second lower locking section 4162a, since the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a are mutually staggered, the originally overlapping first The second upper free section 4151a and the second lower free section 4161a will also be staggered.
  • the second upper free section 4151a and the second lower free section 4161a are mutually staggered to restrict the second shaft 312a from separating from the second upper locking section 4152a and
  • the second lower locking section 4162a can ensure that the second shaft 312a is always maintained at the second upper locking section 4152a and the second lower locking section 4162a while the door 20a continues to be opened.
  • the rotation angle of the second switching element 402a is greater than the rotation angle of the first switching element 401a, that is, the second switching element 402a and the first switching element 401a are staggered with each other, which can further improve the relationship between the first hinge element 31a and the switching assembly 40a.
  • the locking effect ensures that the first shaft body 311a is always maintained at the first upper locking section 4132a and the first lower locking section 4142a, and the second shaft body 312a is always maintained at the second upper locking section 4152a and the second upper locking section 4142a. At the second locking section 4162a.
  • the distance between the third shaft 321a located on the first switching element 401a and the fourth shaft 322a located on the second switching element 402a occurs.
  • the third shaft body 321a is always located in the third free section 4211a, and the fourth shaft body 322a moves from the fourth limit section 4222a to the fourth free section 4221a, that is, the fourth shaft body 322a leaves the fourth limit section 4222a .
  • the line connecting the starting position B1 and the pivoting position B2 is parallel to the moving section M1, that is, at this time, the door body 20a may not rotate but only translate, but not With this limitation, in other embodiments, the door body 20a may also move away from the box body 10a while rotating.
  • the hinge assembly 30a of this embodiment can move the door body 20a as far away from the box body 10a as possible through the translation of the door body 20a, ensuring the opening of the box body 10a, and avoiding the drawers and shelves in the box body 10a from being interfered by the door body 20a.
  • the problem of inability to open can also prevent the side edge 23a from protruding out of the outer surface 13a in a direction away from the containing chamber S.
  • the range of the first opening angle ⁇ 1 is approximately 80°-83°
  • the second opening angle ⁇ 2 is approximately 90°
  • the maximum opening angle ⁇ 3 is greater than 90°, that is, the door body 20a opens to 80°-83°
  • the door body 20a is first displaced in the first direction X to avoid interference between the door body 20a and the surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process, and finally reaches 80° ⁇ 83°.
  • the door body 20a continues In the process of opening to 90°, the switch assembly 40a moves to make the door body 20a replace the rotating shaft and continue to rotate, that is, the door body 20a is displaced in the second direction Y after 90°, so as to prevent the door body 20a from obstructing the inside of the box body 10a.
  • the drawers, shelves, etc. are opened, and the rear door body 20a uses the third shaft body 321a as a rotation axis to continue to rotate in situ relative to the box body 10a to further open the door body 20a.
  • this embodiment can effectively control the sequence switching of the first hinge part 31a and the second hinge part 32a through the unlocking and locking effect of the switching assembly 40a on the first hinge part 31a and the second hinge part 32a, so that the door The body 20a can be stably opened.
  • the switching assembly 40a can also effectively control the sequence switching of the first hinge member 31a and the second hinge member 32a, namely When the door 20a is in the process of closing from the maximum opening angle ⁇ 3 to the second opening angle ⁇ 2, the third shaft 321a moves in the third free section 4211a, and the fourth shaft 322a moves in the fourth free section 4221a, and switches The assembly 40a locks the first hinge member 31a.
  • the first switching member 401a and the second switching member 402a move relative to each other so that the first The hinge member 31a is out of the limit of the switching assembly 40a, and the fourth shaft body 322a is limited to the fourth limit section 4222a.
  • the switching assembly 40a locks the second hinge member 32a.
  • the closing process of the door body 20a and the opening process of the door body 20a are in the opposite sequence.
  • the unlocking and locking functions of the first hinge member 31a and the second hinge member 32a by the switching assembly 40a can effectively control the door.
  • the center of the first shaft body 311a and the side edges 23a are at a first distance
  • the center of the first shaft body 311a and the front wall 21a are at a second distance
  • the center of the first shaft body 311a is There is a third distance between the side walls 22a.
  • the interval is the sixth interval.
  • the distance change is not limited to the above description.
  • the fifth distance always remains unchanged, and the fourth The distance and the sixth distance both increase first and then remain unchanged, and so on.
  • the first shaft body 311a and the third shaft body 321a are staggered from each other, so that it can be applied to a scene where a built-in cabinet or a space for accommodating the refrigerator 100a is small.
  • the refrigerator 100 is a refrigerator 100 with a wiring module 60.
  • the wiring module 60 includes a fixed end 61 and a free end 62 that are arranged oppositely.
  • the fixed end 61 is connected to the door body 20.
  • the free end 62 is movably arranged on the box body 10.
  • the wiring E of the box body 10 passes through the free end 62 and the fixed end in turn.
  • the end 61 extends to the door body 20.
  • the free end 62 is movably arranged on the box body 10
  • the free end 62 and the box body 10 are not fixed.
  • the wire E in the wire module 60 can also move freely as the door 20 is opened.
  • the wiring E of this embodiment extends to the door 20 through the wiring module 60, which can effectively avoid the phenomenon that the wiring E is pulled during the opening and closing process of the door 20, and can be adapted to The door body 20 with various motion trajectories, for example, when the hinge assembly 30 drives the door body 20 to move from the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S, the extension trajectory of the wiring E will also change.
  • the wiring module 60 is used. The design can be fully adapted to this movement of the door body 20, and the extension track of the wiring E can be flexibly adjusted by the wiring module 60 to avoid wire jamming.
  • the refrigerator 100 further includes a limiting space 101.
  • the limiting space 101 includes a notch 1011 disposed toward the door body 20.
  • the fixed end 61 of the cable routing module 60 passes through the notch 1011 to connect to the door body 20.
  • the door body 20 drives the wire routing module 60 to move in the limiting space 101, and the free end 62 is always located in the limiting space 101.
  • the limiting space 101 is located at the top 11 of the box body 10, the wiring module 60 is arranged parallel to the top 11 of the box body 10, and the fixed end 61 is movably connected to the door body 20.
  • the limiting space 101 can also be set in other areas .
  • the wiring module 60 includes a first housing 601 and a second housing 602.
  • the second housing 602 is disposed adjacent to the top 11 of the box 10, and the first housing 601 is opposite to the second housing 602. 602 is away from the top 11 of the box 10, the first housing 601 and the second housing 602 cooperate with each other to form an accommodating cavity 603 for accommodating the wire E.
  • the two ends of the accommodating cavity 603 are opened as a fixed end 61 and a free end 62.
  • the door body 20 protrudes upwards from the top 11 of the box body 10.
  • the edge of the top 11 close to the door 20 is provided with a stop 111 protruding from the top 11, and the stop 111 is provided with a notch 1011.
  • the refrigerator 100 includes a protrusion A plurality of protrusions 112 of the top portion 11 are formed, and the plurality of protrusions 112 are enclosed to form a limiting space 101.
  • the first hinge member 31 is fixed at the edge position of the top 11, and in order to adapt to the design of the door body 20 protruding from the top 11, the first hinge member 31 of the hinge assembly 30 is roughly Z-shaped.
  • the first hinge member 31 It can be extended from the top 11 of the box body 10 to the top of the door body 20 to be compatible with the switching assembly 40 on the top of the door body 20, and the plurality of protrusions 112 include a first hinge between the first hinge part 31 and the cable routing module 60.
  • the protruding portion 1121 and the second protruding portion 1122 are spaced apart from the first protruding portion 1121.
  • the first protruding portion 1121 can prevent the wiring module 60 from interfering with the first hinge member 31, and the outline of the first protruding portion 1121 and the wiring
  • the movement trajectory of the module 60 is adapted, and the second protrusion 1122 may be a plurality of protrusions to reduce the collision between the wiring module 60 and the second protrusion 1122.
  • the refrigerator 100 may further include a cover body 103, which is located on the top 11 and covers the limiting space 101, the first hinge member 31, etc.
  • the cover body 103 can be adapted to the stop 111, and the shape of the cover body 103 can be adjusted according to It depends on specific needs.
  • the fixed end 61 and the notch 1011 of the cable routing module 60 are located close to the hinge assembly 30. It can be understood that during the opening process of the door body 20, the cable routing module 60 will be exposed in the opening gap of the door body 20, and the fixed end 61 and the notch 1011 are arranged close to the hinge assembly 30. On the one hand, the movement trajectory of the wiring module 60 can be reasonably controlled, and on the other hand, it can prevent the wiring module 60 from affecting the appearance and normal use of the refrigerator 100.
  • the wiring module 60 is arranged horizontally and extends through the slot 1011 to the door body 20.
  • the door body 20 is provided with a wiring hole H, and the wiring E extends from the fixed end 61 and extends from the wiring hole H to the door body 20 Inside, the area C adjacent to the wiring hole H is pivotally connected to the fixed end 61 area, and the door body 20 includes a cover 24 covering the fixed end 61, the wiring hole H and the area C.
  • the wiring module 60 can be realized
  • the wiring module 60 includes a circular arc segment D, which can further prevent the wiring E from being disturbed inside the receiving cavity 603.
  • a buffer member or sliding member, etc. can be provided between the second housing 602 of the wiring module 60 and the top 11 of the box body 10, which may be based on actual conditions. It depends on the situation.
  • the notch 1011 of the limiting space 101 has a first notch width
  • the wiring module 60 includes a movable portion 63 located between the fixed end 61 and the free end 62, and the first notch width is larger than the movable portion 63 The maximum width.
  • the movable portion 63 gradually protrudes out of the limiting space 101, and the width of the first notch is greater than the maximum width of the movable portion 63, which can prevent the notch 1011 from restricting the protruding limit of the movable portion 63.
  • the position space 101 and the notch 1011 can control the movement trajectory of the wiring module 60 to a certain extent, so as to prevent the wiring module 60 from moving out of the limit space 101 due to excessive movement.
  • the free end 62 may be arranged in a bent shape, that is, an included angle is formed between the free end 62 and the movable portion 63.

Abstract

Disclosed in the present invention is a refrigerator having a switch assembly, comprising a main body, a door for opening and closing the main body and a hinge assembly for connecting the main body to the door. The main body comprises a container chamber and a pivot side for connecting the hinge assembly. The hinge assembly comprises a first hinge, a second hinge and a switch assembly for connecting the first hinge to the second hinge. When the door is in the opening process, the first hinge first moves relative to the switch assembly and then the second hinge moves relative to the switch assembly, wherein the hinge assembly first drives the door to move from the pivot side towards the container chamber, and then the hinge assembly drives the door to move from the container chamber towards the pivot side. The refrigerator of the present invention can increase the degree of freedom of opening and closing the door and can have various movement paths so as to adapt to different application scenarios.

Description

带有切换组件的冰箱Refrigerator with switching component
本申请要求了申请日为2019年08月28日,申请号为201910803432.9,发明名称为“带有切换组件的冰箱”、申请日为2019年08月28日,申请号为201910803419.3,发明名称为“带有多轴铰链组件的自由嵌入式冰箱”、申请日为2019年08月28日,申请号为201910804448.1,发明名称为“带有多轴铰链组件的嵌入式冰箱”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application requires that the application date is August 28, 2019, the application number is 201910803432.9, the invention name is "Refrigerator with Switching Components", the application date is August 28, 2019, the application number is 201910803419.3, and the invention name is " Priority of the Chinese patent application with the application date of August 28, 2019, the application number is 201910804448.1, and the title of the invention is "Built-in refrigerator with multi-axis hinge assembly". , Its entire content is incorporated into this application by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本发明涉及家电技术领域,尤其涉及一种带有切换组件的冰箱。The invention relates to the technical field of household appliances, and in particular to a refrigerator with a switching component.
背景技术Background technique
通常情况下,冰箱和门体之间都是通过一个固定的铰链件来实现相对运动,门体的开闭自由度会大大受限,即无法自由控制门体运动轨迹以适应不同的应用场景。Under normal circumstances, a fixed hinge is used to achieve relative movement between the refrigerator and the door, and the degree of freedom of opening and closing of the door is greatly limited, that is, it is impossible to freely control the movement trajectory of the door to adapt to different application scenarios.
例如,从最近几年来看,随着社会的进步,人们生活水平的提高,对冰箱在家庭的摆放位置与摆放方式越来越被普通用户看重,而针对目前的家装风格,部分家庭追求风格一体化,就需要把冰箱放入橱柜中,构成所谓的嵌入式冰箱装置,所述冰箱称为嵌入式冰箱,目前的冰箱难以适应这种嵌入式应用场景。For example, in recent years, with the progress of society and the improvement of people’s living standards, the placement and placement of refrigerators in the home has become more and more important to ordinary users. However, in view of the current home decoration style, some families pursue If the style is integrated, it is necessary to put the refrigerator in the cabinet to form a so-called embedded refrigerator device. The refrigerator is called an embedded refrigerator, and it is difficult for current refrigerators to adapt to such embedded application scenarios.
有鉴于此,有必要对现有的冰箱予以改进,以解决上述问题。In view of this, it is necessary to improve the existing refrigerators to solve the above-mentioned problems.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本发明的目的在于提供一种带有切换组件的冰箱,其可以有效提高门体开闭自由度。The object of the present invention is to provide a refrigerator with a switch assembly, which can effectively improve the degree of freedom of opening and closing the door.
为实现上述发明目的之一,本发明一实施方式提供一种带有切换组件的冰箱,包括箱体、用以打开和关闭箱体的门体以及连接箱体及门体的铰链组件,箱体包括容纳腔室及连接铰链组件的枢转侧,所述铰链组件包括第一铰链件、第二铰链件以及连接所述第一铰链件及所述第二铰链件的切换组件,当所述门体处于开启过程中时,所述第一铰链件先相对所述切换组件运动,而后所述第二铰链件相对所述切换组件运动,其中,所述铰链组件先驱动所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后所述铰链组件驱动所述门体由所述容纳腔室朝向所述枢转侧移动。In order to achieve one of the objectives of the above-mentioned invention, an embodiment of the present invention provides a refrigerator with a switch assembly, including a box body, a door body for opening and closing the box body, and a hinge assembly connecting the box body and the door body. It includes a receiving chamber and a pivot side connected to a hinge assembly. The hinge assembly includes a first hinge part, a second hinge part, and a switching assembly connecting the first hinge part and the second hinge part. When the door When the body is in the opening process, the first hinge member first moves relative to the switch assembly, and then the second hinge member moves relative to the switch assembly, wherein the hinge assembly first drives the door body to pivot The side moves toward the accommodating chamber, and then the hinge assembly drives the door body to move from the accommodating chamber toward the pivoting side.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件固定于所述箱体,所述第二铰链件固定于所述门体,所述切换组件包括第一配合件及第二配合件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一铰链件与所述第一配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后所述第一铰链件与所述第一配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体由容纳腔室朝向枢转侧移动,且所述第二配合件限位所述第二铰链件,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第二铰链件脱离所述第二配合件的限位,且所述第一配合件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第二铰链件与所述第二配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first hinge part is fixed to the box body, the second hinge part is fixed to the door body, and the switching assembly includes a first matching part and a second matching part When the door body is in the process of being opened from the closed state to the first opening angle, the first hinge member and the first matching member move relative to each other to drive the door body from the pivoting side toward the accommodating chamber And then the first hinge part and the first matching part move relative to each other to drive the door body to move from the containing chamber toward the pivoting side, and the second matching part limits the second hinge part, When the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle, the second hinge part is separated from the limit of the second matching part, and the first matching part is limited by the The first hinge member, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the second hinge member and the second matching member move relative to each other to drive the door body relatively The box body rotates in situ.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件固定于所述箱体,所述第二铰链件固定于所述门体,所述切换组件包括第一配合件及第二配合件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一铰链件与所述第一配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,且所述第二配合件限位所述第二铰链件,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第二铰链件脱离所述第二配合件的限位,且所述第一配合件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第二铰链件与所述第二配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体由容纳腔室朝向枢转侧移动,而后所述第一铰链件与所述第二配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first hinge part is fixed to the box body, the second hinge part is fixed to the door body, and the switching assembly includes a first matching part and a second matching part When the door body is in the process of being opened from the closed state to the first opening angle, the first hinge member and the first matching member move relative to each other to drive the door body from the pivoting side toward the accommodating chamber Moves, and the second matching member limits the second hinge member. When the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle, the second hinge member is separated from the The position of the second matching part is limited, and the first matching part limits the first hinge part. When the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the second The hinge member and the second matching member move relative to each other to drive the door body to move from the containing chamber toward the pivot side, and then the first hinge member and the second matching member move relative to each other to drive the door body relative to each other. The box body rotates in situ.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体包括邻近所述铰链组件且在所述门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述门体包括远离所述容纳腔室的前壁及始终夹设于所述前壁及所述容纳腔室之间的侧壁,所述前壁与所述侧壁之间具有侧棱,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述侧棱运动至位于所述外侧面靠近所述容纳腔室的一侧。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the box body includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and the door body includes a front wall away from the accommodating chamber and The side wall always sandwiched between the front wall and the accommodating chamber, there is a side edge between the front wall and the side wall, when the door is opened from the closed state to the first opening angle During the process, the side edge moves to the side of the outer side close to the containing chamber.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述切换组件包括相互配合的第一切换件及第二切换件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中或是处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件相对所述第二切换件运动而使得所述第二铰链件脱离所述第二配合件的限位,且所述第一配合件限位所述第一铰链件。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the switching assembly includes a first switching element and a second switching element that cooperate with each other. When the door body is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle or is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle. When the second opening angle continues to open to the maximum opening angle, the first switching element and the second switching element are relatively stationary, and when the door body is at a position that continues to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle During the process, the first switching element moves relative to the second switching element so that the second hinge element is separated from the limit of the second matching element, and the first matching element limits the first Hinge pieces.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件与所述第一配合件之间通过相互配合的第一轴体组及第一槽体组实现相对运动,所述第二铰链件与所述第二配合件之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组及第二槽体组实现相对运动,所述第一轴体组包括第一轴体及第二轴体,所述第一槽体组包括与所述第一轴体配合的第一槽体及与所述第二轴体配合的第二槽体,所述第二轴体组包括第三轴体及第四轴体,所述第二槽体组包括与所述第三轴体 配合的第三槽体及与所述第四轴体配合的第四槽体。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first hinge member and the first matching member realize relative movement through the first shaft body group and the first groove body group that cooperate with each other, and the second hinge member The relative movement with the second matching member is achieved through the second shaft body group and the second groove body group that cooperate with each other. The first shaft body group includes a first shaft body and a second shaft body. The groove body group includes a first groove body matched with the first shaft body and a second groove body matched with the second shaft body, and the second shaft body group includes a third shaft body and a fourth shaft body, The second groove body group includes a third groove body matched with the third shaft body and a fourth groove body matched with the fourth shaft body.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件包括所述第一轴体及所述第二轴体,所述第一配合件包括所述第一槽体及所述第二槽体,所述第二配合件包括所述第三轴体及所述第四轴体,所述第二铰链件包括所述第三槽体及所述第四槽体。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first hinge member includes the first shaft body and the second shaft body, and the first matching member includes the first groove body and the second groove The second matching member includes the third shaft body and the fourth shaft body, and the second hinge member includes the third groove body and the fourth groove body.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第一上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第一下槽体,所述第一上槽体包括第一上自由段,所述第一下槽体包括第一下自由段,所述第二槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第二上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第二下槽体,所述第二上槽体包括第二上自由段,所述第二下槽体包括第二下自由段,所述第三槽体包括第三自由段,所述第四槽体包括第四自由段,所述第一槽体组包括锁止段,所述第二槽体组包括限位段,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止,所述第一上自由段与所述第一下自由段重合形成第一自由段,所述第二上自由段与所述第二下自由段重合形成第二自由段,所述第一轴体于所述第一自由段运动,所述第二轴体于所述第二自由段运动,所述第三轴体和/或所述第四轴体限位于所述限位段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第二铰链件,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件及所述第二切换件相对运动而使得所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,且所述第一轴体和/或所述第二轴体限位于所述锁止段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体于所述第三自由段内运动,所述第四轴体于所述第四自由段运动。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first tank includes a first upper tank located on the first switching member and a first lower tank located on the second switching member, the first upper The trough body includes a first upper free section, the first lower trough body includes a first lower free section, the second trough body includes a second upper trough body located at the first switching member and a second upper trough located at the second switch The second lower groove body of the piece, the second upper groove body includes a second upper free section, the second lower groove body includes a second lower free section, the third groove body includes a third free section, the The fourth tank body includes a fourth free section, the first tank body group includes a locking section, and the second tank body group includes a limiting section. When the door body is opened from a closed state to a first opening angle During the process, the first switching member and the second switching member are relatively stationary, the first upper free section and the first lower free section overlap to form a first free section, and the second upper free section is The second lower free section overlaps to form a second free section, the first shaft body moves in the first free section, the second shaft body moves in the second free section, and the third shaft body And/or the fourth shaft body is limited to the limit section so that the switching assembly limits the second hinge member, when the door body is at a position where the door body continues to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle During the process, the first switching element and the second switching element move relative to each other so that the fourth shaft body separates from the limiting section, and the first shaft body and/or the second shaft body Is limited to the locking section so that the switching assembly limits the first hinge member. When the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the third shaft body When moving in the third free section, the fourth shaft moves in the fourth free section.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述锁止段包括位于所述第一上槽体的第一上锁止段、位于所述第一下槽体的第一下锁止段、位于所述第二上槽体的第二上锁止段及位于所述第二下槽体的第二下锁止段,所述限位段包括位于所述第四槽体的第四限位段,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体限位于所述第四限位段,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体同时限位于所述第一上锁止段及所述第一下锁止段,所述第二轴体同时限位于所述第二上锁止段及所述第二下锁止段,且所述第四轴体脱离所述第四限位段。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the locking section includes a first upper locking section located in the first upper tank, a first lower locking section located in the first lower tank, and The second upper locking section of the second upper tank body and the second lower locking section located on the second lower tank body, the limiting section includes a fourth limiting section located on the fourth tank body, When the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the fourth shaft is limited to the fourth limiting section, and when the door is at the first opening angle, it continues to open to In the process of the second opening angle, the first shaft body is confined to the first upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time, and the second shaft body is confined to the second upper locking section at the same time. The locking section and the second lower locking section, and the fourth shaft body is separated from the fourth limiting section.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一上锁止段与所述第一下锁止段始终相互错开,所述第二上锁止段与所述第二下锁止段始终相互错开。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first upper locking section and the first lower locking section are always mutually staggered, and the second upper locking section and the second lower locking section are always mutually offset. stagger.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一自由段包括相对设置的初始位置及停止位置,所述第二自由段包括相连的第一段及第二段,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体位于所述初始位置,所述第二轴体位于所述第一段远离所述第二段的一端,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第二轴体于所述第一段内运动而带动所述第一轴体由所述初始位置运动至所述停止位置,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后所述第二轴体于所述第二段内运动而带动所述第一轴体朝向所述初始位置运动,所述门体由容纳腔室朝向枢转侧移动,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体于所述第三自由段内原地转动,所述第四轴体以所述第三轴体为圆心而于所述第四自由段运动。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first free section includes an initial position and a stop position that are relatively set, and the second free section includes a first section and a second section that are connected. When the door is closed In the state, the first shaft is at the initial position, and the second shaft is at the end of the first section away from the second section. When the door is opened from the closed state to the first open When the angle is in progress, the second shaft moves in the first section to drive the first shaft to move from the initial position to the stop position, and the door body moves from the pivoting side to the receiving position The chamber moves, and then the second shaft moves in the second section to drive the first shaft to move toward the initial position. The door moves from the accommodating chamber toward the pivoting side. When the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the third shaft body rotates in situ in the third free section, and the fourth shaft body is based on the third shaft body It moves in the fourth free section for the center of the circle.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第一间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第二间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第三间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第四间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第五间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第六间距,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一间距、所述第二间距及所述第三间距均先呈减小趋势后呈增大趋势,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四间距、所述第五间距及所述第六间距均保持不变。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, there is a first distance between the center of the first shaft and the side edges, and a second distance is between the center of the first shaft and the front wall, There is a third distance between the center of the first shaft and the side wall, a fourth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side edges, and the center of the third shaft is There is a fifth distance between the front walls, and a sixth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side walls. When the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, The first distance, the second distance, and the third distance all show a decreasing trend first and then an increasing trend, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle , The fourth pitch, the fifth pitch, and the sixth pitch remain unchanged.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一自由段包括相对设置的初始位置及停止位置,所述第三自由段包括相对设置的起始位置及枢转位置,所述第四自由段包括相连的移动段及转动段,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体位于所述初始位置,所述第二轴体位于所述第二自由段的一端,所述第三轴体位于所述起始位置,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第二轴体于所述第二自由段内运动而带动所述第一轴体由所述初始位置运动至所述停止位置,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体于所述移动段内运动而带动所述第三轴体由所述起始位置运动至所述枢转位置,而后所述第三轴体于所述枢转位置原地转动,所述第四轴体以所述第三轴体为圆心而于所述转动段运动。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first free section includes a relatively set initial position and a stop position, the third free section includes a relatively set starting position and a pivot position, and the fourth free section It includes a connected moving section and a rotating section. When the door body is in a closed state, the first shaft is located at the initial position, the second shaft is located at one end of the second free section, and the first shaft is located at one end of the second free section. The three-axis body is located at the starting position. When the door body is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the second shaft body moves in the second free section to drive the first A shaft body moves from the initial position to the stop position, the door body moves from the pivoting side toward the accommodating chamber, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle , The fourth shaft moves in the moving section to drive the third shaft to move from the starting position to the pivot position, and then the third shaft moves to the pivot position. Ground rotation, the fourth shaft body moves in the rotating section with the third shaft body as the center of the circle.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第一间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第二间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第三间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第四间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第五间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第 六间距,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一间距、所述第二间距及所述第三间距均呈减小趋势,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四间距、所述第五间距及所述第六间距均先呈增大趋势后保持不变。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, there is a first distance between the center of the first shaft and the side edges, and a second distance is between the center of the first shaft and the front wall, There is a third distance between the center of the first shaft and the side wall, a fourth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side edges, and the center of the third shaft is There is a fifth distance between the front walls, and a sixth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side walls. When the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, The first distance, the second distance, and the third distance all show a decreasing trend. When the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the fourth distance , The fifth distance and the sixth distance both show an increasing trend first and then remain unchanged.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件及所述第二切换件通过第五轴体相互配接,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体以所述第五轴体为圆心运动至所述锁止段。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first switching element and the second switching element are connected to each other through a fifth shaft body, and when the door body is at a first opening angle, it continues to open to a second opening angle During the process, the first shaft moves to the locking section with the fifth shaft as the center.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件相较于所述第二切换件靠近所述第一铰链件。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first switching element is closer to the first hinge element than the second switching element.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件包括所述第三轴体,所述第二切换件具有通孔,所述第三轴体通过所述通孔而延伸至所述第三槽体,所述第二切换件包括所述第四轴体,所述第四轴体延伸至所述第四槽体。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first switching member includes the third shaft body, the second switching member has a through hole, and the third shaft body extends to the through hole through the through hole. The third groove body, the second switching member includes the fourth shaft body, and the fourth shaft body extends to the fourth groove body.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体包括开口及环绕所述开口设置的前端面,所述第一轴体与所述前端面之间具有第一距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述前端面之间具有第二距离,所述第二距离大于所述第一距离。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the box body includes an opening and a front end surface arranged around the opening, and there is a first distance between the first shaft body and the front end surface. In the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a second distance between the third shaft body and the front end surface, and the second distance is greater than the first distance.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述冰箱还包括邻近铰链组件且在门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述第一轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第三距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第四距离,所述第四距离小于所述第三距离。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the refrigerator further includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and there is a third distance between the first shaft body and the outer side surface, when When the door is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a fourth distance between the third shaft and the outer side surface, and the fourth distance is smaller than the third distance .
为实现上述发明目的之一,本发明一实施方式提供一种带有多轴铰链组件的自由嵌入式冰箱,包括箱体、用以打开和关闭箱体的门体以及连接箱体及门体的铰链组件,箱体包括容纳腔室及连接铰链组件的枢转侧,所述铰链组件包括固定于所述箱体的第一铰链件、固定于所述门体的第二铰链件以及连接所述第一铰链件及所述第二铰链件的切换组件,所述第一铰链件与所述切换组件之间通过相互配合的第一轴体组及第一槽体组实现相对运动,所述第一轴体组包括第一轴体及第二轴体,所述第一槽体组包括第一自由段、第二自由段及锁止段,所述第一自由段包括相对设置的初始位置及停止位置,所述第二自由段包括相连的第一段及第二段,所述第二铰链件与所述切换组件之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组及第二槽体组实现相对运动,所述第二轴体组包括第三轴体及第四轴体,所述第二槽体组包括第三自由段、第四自由段及限位段,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体位于所述初始位置,所述第二轴体位于所述第一段远离所述第二段的一端,且所述第四轴体位于所述限位段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第二铰链件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第二轴体于所述第一段内运动而带动所述第一轴体由所述初始位置运动至所述停止位置,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后所述第二轴体于所述第二段内运动而带动所述第一轴体朝向所述初始位置运动,所述门体由容纳腔室朝向枢转侧移动,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,且所述第一轴体和/或所述第二轴体限位于所述锁止段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体于所述第三自由段内原地转动,所述第四轴体以所述第三轴体为圆心而于所述第四自由段运动。In order to achieve one of the objectives of the above-mentioned invention, an embodiment of the present invention provides a free embedded refrigerator with a multi-axis hinge assembly, including a box body, a door body for opening and closing the box body, and a connecting box body and the door body. A hinge assembly, the box body includes a receiving chamber and a pivot side connected to the hinge assembly, the hinge assembly includes a first hinge part fixed to the box body, a second hinge part fixed to the door body, and a hinge part connected to the door body. The first hinge member and the switching assembly of the second hinge member, the first hinge member and the switching assembly realize relative movement through the first shaft body group and the first groove body group that cooperate with each other, and the first hinge member and the second hinge member realize relative movement. A shaft body group includes a first shaft body and a second shaft body. The first groove body group includes a first free section, a second free section, and a locking section. The first free section includes a relatively set initial position and In the stop position, the second free section includes a first section and a second section that are connected, and the second hinge member and the switching assembly are opposed to each other through a second shaft body group and a second groove body group that cooperate with each other Movement, the second shaft body group includes a third shaft body and a fourth shaft body, the second groove body group includes a third free section, a fourth free section and a limit section, when the door body is in a closed state When the first shaft is located at the initial position, the second shaft is located at an end of the first section away from the second section, and the fourth shaft is located at the limiting section so that The switching assembly limits the second hinge member. When the door body is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the second shaft body moves in the first section to drive the The first shaft moves from the initial position to the stop position, the door moves from the pivoting side toward the accommodating chamber, and then the second shaft moves in the second section to drive the The first shaft moves toward the initial position, the door moves from the accommodating chamber toward the pivoting side, and when the door is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle, the The fourth shaft body is separated from the limiting section, and the first shaft body and/or the second shaft body is limited in the locking section so that the switching assembly limits the first hinge member, when When the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the third shaft body rotates in situ in the third free section, and the fourth shaft body rotates with the third shaft The body is centered and moves in the fourth free section.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体包括邻近所述铰链组件且在所述门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述门体包括远离所述容纳腔室的前壁及始终夹设于所述前壁及所述容纳腔室之间的侧壁,所述前壁与所述侧壁之间具有侧棱,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动而使得所述侧棱运动至位于所述外侧面靠近所述容纳腔室的一侧,而后所述门体由容纳腔室朝向枢转侧移动而使得所述侧棱保持在所述外侧面靠近所述容纳腔室的一侧。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the box body includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and the door body includes a front wall away from the accommodating chamber and The side wall always sandwiched between the front wall and the accommodating chamber, there is a side edge between the front wall and the side wall, when the door is opened from the closed state to the first opening angle During the process, the door body moves from the pivoting side toward the accommodating chamber so that the side edge moves to the side of the outer side close to the accommodating chamber, and then the door body is moved from the accommodating chamber Moving toward the pivoting side so that the side edge remains on the side of the outer side surface close to the receiving chamber.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件包括所述第一轴体及所述第二轴体,所述切换组件包括具有所述第一自由段的第一槽体、具有所述第二自由段的第二槽体、所述第三轴体及所述第四轴体,所述第二铰链件包括具有所述第三自由段的第三槽体及具有所述第四自由段的第四槽体。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first hinge member includes the first shaft body and the second shaft body, and the switching assembly includes a first groove body having the first free section, The second groove body of the second free section, the third shaft body and the fourth shaft body, and the second hinge member includes a third groove body having the third free section and a third groove body having the first free section. The fourth tank with four free sections.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述切换组件包括相互配合的第一切换件及第二切换件,所述第一槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第一上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第一下槽体,所述第一自由段包括位于所述第一上槽体的第一上自由段及位于所述第一下槽体的第一下自由段,所述第二槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第二上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第二下槽体,所述第二自由段包括位于所述第二上槽体的第二上自由段及位于所述第二下槽体的第二下自由段,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止,所述第一上自由段与所述第一下自由段重合形成所述第一自由段,所述第二上自由段与所述第二下自由段重合形成所述第二自由段,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件相对所述第二切换件运动而使得所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,且所述第一轴体和/或所述 第二轴体限位于所述锁止段,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the switching assembly includes a first switching member and a second switching member that cooperate with each other, and the first tank includes a first upper tank located on the first switching member and a first upper tank located on the first switching member. In the first lower tank body of the second switching member, the first free section includes a first upper free section located in the first upper tank body and a first lower free section located in the first lower tank body, The second tank body includes a second upper tank body located in the first switching member and a second lower tank body located in the second switching member, and the second free section includes a second upper tank body located in the The second upper free section and the second lower free section located in the second lower tank, when the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the first switching member and the The second switching member is relatively stationary, the first upper free section and the first lower free section overlap to form the first free section, and the second upper free section and the second lower free section overlap to form the first free section. In the second free section, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle, the first switching element moves relative to the second switching element so that the fourth axis The body is separated from the limiting section, and the first shaft body and/or the second shaft body is limited to the locking section, when the door body continues to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle During the process, the first switching element and the second switching element are relatively stationary.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述锁止段包括连通所述第一上自由段的第一上锁止段、连通所述第一下自由段的第一下锁止段、连通所述第二上自由段的第二上锁止段及连通所述第二下自由段的第二下锁止段,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体同时限位于所述第一上锁止段及所述第一下锁止段,所述第二轴体同时限位于所述第二上锁止段及所述第二下锁止段。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the locking section includes a first upper locking section communicating with the first upper free section, a first lower locking section communicating with the first lower free section, and a communicating station. The second upper locking section of the second upper free section and the second lower locking section communicating with the second lower free section, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle In the middle, the first shaft body is confined to the first upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time, and the second shaft body is confined to the second upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time. The second lower locking section.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一上锁止段与所述第一下锁止段始终相互错开,所述第二上锁止段与所述第二下锁止段始终相互错开。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first upper locking section and the first lower locking section are always mutually staggered, and the second upper locking section and the second lower locking section are always mutually offset. stagger.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第一间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第二间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第三间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第四间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第五间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第六间距,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一间距、所述第二间距及所述第三间距均先呈减小趋势后呈增大趋势,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四间距、所述第五间距及所述第六间距均保持不变。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, there is a first distance between the center of the first shaft and the side edges, and a second distance is between the center of the first shaft and the front wall, There is a third distance between the center of the first shaft and the side wall, a fourth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side edges, and the center of the third shaft is There is a fifth distance between the front walls, and a sixth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side walls. When the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, The first distance, the second distance, and the third distance all show a decreasing trend first and then an increasing trend, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle , The fourth pitch, the fifth pitch, and the sixth pitch remain unchanged.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件及所述第二切换件通过第五轴体相互配接,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体以所述第五轴体为圆心运动至所述锁止段。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first switching element and the second switching element are connected to each other through a fifth shaft body, and when the door body is at a first opening angle, it continues to open to a second opening angle During the process, the first shaft moves to the locking section with the fifth shaft as the center.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件相较于所述第二切换件靠近所述第一铰链件。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first switching element is closer to the first hinge element than the second switching element.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件包括所述第三轴体,所述第二切换件具有通孔,所述第三轴体通过所述通孔而延伸至所述第三槽体,所述第二切换件包括所述第四轴体,所述第四轴体延伸至所述第四槽体。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first switching member includes the third shaft body, the second switching member has a through hole, and the third shaft body extends to the through hole through the through hole. The third groove body, the second switching member includes the fourth shaft body, and the fourth shaft body extends to the fourth groove body.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体包括开口及环绕所述开口设置的前端面,所述第一轴体与所述前端面之间具有第一距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述前端面之间具有第二距离,所述第二距离大于所述第一距离。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the box body includes an opening and a front end surface arranged around the opening, and there is a first distance between the first shaft body and the front end surface. In the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a second distance between the third shaft body and the front end surface, and the second distance is greater than the first distance.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述冰箱还包括邻近铰链组件且在门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述第一轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第三距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第四距离,所述第四距离小于所述第三距离。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the refrigerator further includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and there is a third distance between the first shaft body and the outer side surface, when When the door is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a fourth distance between the third shaft and the outer side surface, and the fourth distance is smaller than the third distance .
为实现上述发明目的之一,本发明一实施方式提供一种带有多轴铰链组件的嵌入式冰箱,包括箱体、用以打开和关闭箱体的门体以及连接箱体及门体的铰链组件,箱体包括容纳腔室及连接铰链组件的枢转侧,所述铰链组件包括固定于所述箱体的第一铰链件、固定于所述门体的第二铰链件以及连接所述第一铰链件及所述第二铰链件的切换组件,所述第一铰链件与所述切换组件之间通过相互配合的第一轴体组及第一槽体组实现相对运动,所述第一轴体组包括第一轴体及第二轴体,所述第一槽体组包括第一自由段、第二自由段及锁止段,所述第一自由段包括相对设置的初始位置及停止位置,所述第二铰链件与所述切换组件之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组及第二槽体组实现相对运动,所述第二轴体组包括第三轴体及第四轴体,所述第二槽体组包括第三自由段、第四自由段及限位段,所述第三自由段包括相对设置的起始位置及枢转位置,所述第四自由段包括相连的移动段及转动段,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体位于所述初始位置,所述第二轴体位于所述第二自由段的一端,所述第三轴体位于所述起始位置,且所述第四轴体位于所述限位段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第二铰链件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第二轴体于所述第二自由段内运动而带动所述第一轴体由所述初始位置运动至所述停止位置,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,且所述第一轴体和/或所述第二轴体限位于所述锁止段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体于所述移动段内运动而带动所述第三轴体由所述起始位置运动至所述枢转位置,所述门体由容纳腔室朝向枢转侧移动,而后所述第三轴体于所述枢转位置原地转动,所述第四轴体以所述第三轴体为圆心而于所述转动段运动。In order to achieve one of the above-mentioned objects of the invention, an embodiment of the present invention provides an embedded refrigerator with a multi-axis hinge assembly, including a box body, a door body for opening and closing the box body, and a hinge connecting the box body and the door body Assembly, the box body includes a receiving chamber and a pivot side connected to a hinge assembly, the hinge assembly includes a first hinge part fixed to the box body, a second hinge part fixed to the door body, and a second hinge part connected to the first hinge part. A hinge part and a switching assembly of the second hinge part, the first hinge part and the switching assembly realize relative movement through a first shaft group and a first groove body group that cooperate with each other, the first The shaft body group includes a first shaft body and a second shaft body. The first groove body group includes a first free section, a second free section and a locking section. The first free section includes a relatively set initial position and a stop. Position, the second hinge member and the switching assembly realize relative movement through a second shaft body group and a second groove body group that cooperate with each other, and the second shaft body group includes a third shaft body and a fourth shaft Body, the second slot body group includes a third free section, a fourth free section and a limiting section, the third free section includes a relatively set starting position and a pivot position, and the fourth free section includes a connected When the door is in the closed state, the first shaft is located at the initial position, the second shaft is located at one end of the second free section, and the third shaft Body is located in the starting position, and the fourth shaft body is located in the limiting section so that the switching assembly limits the second hinge member, when the door body is opened from the closed state to the first open When the angle is in progress, the second shaft moves in the second free section to drive the first shaft to move from the initial position to the stop position, and the door body faces from the pivoting side The accommodating chamber moves, and when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle, the fourth shaft body is separated from the limiting section, and the first shaft body and/ Or the second shaft body is confined to the locking section so that the switching assembly constrains the first hinge member, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle , The fourth shaft body moves in the moving section to drive the third shaft body to move from the starting position to the pivoting position, and the door body moves from the accommodating chamber toward the pivoting side, Then the third shaft body rotates in situ at the pivot position, and the fourth shaft body moves in the rotating section with the third shaft body as the center of the circle.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体包括邻近所述铰链组件且在所述门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述门体包括远离所述容纳腔室的前壁及始终夹设于所述前壁及所述容纳腔室之间的侧壁,所述前壁与所述侧壁之间具有侧棱,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述侧棱运动至位于所述外侧面靠近所述容纳腔室的一侧。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the box body includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and the door body includes a front wall away from the accommodating chamber and The side wall always sandwiched between the front wall and the accommodating chamber, there is a side edge between the front wall and the side wall, when the door is opened from the closed state to the first opening angle During the process, the side edge moves to the side of the outer side close to the containing chamber.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件包括所述第一轴体及所述第二轴体,所述切换组件包括具有所述第一自由段的第一槽体、具有所述第二自由段的第二槽体、所述第三轴体及所述第四轴体,所述第二铰链件包括具有所述第三自由段的第三槽体及具有所述第四自由段的第四槽体。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first hinge member includes the first shaft body and the second shaft body, and the switching assembly includes a first groove body having the first free section, The second groove body of the second free section, the third shaft body and the fourth shaft body, and the second hinge member includes a third groove body having the third free section and a third groove body having the first free section. The fourth tank with four free sections.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述切换组件包括相互配合的第一切换件及第二切换件,所述第一槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第一上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第一下槽体,所述第一自由段包括位于所述第一上槽体的第一上自由段及位于所述第一下槽体的第一下自由段,所述第二槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第二上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第二下槽体,所述第二自由段包括位于所述第二上槽体的第二上自由段及位于所述第二下槽体的第二下自由段,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止,所述第一上自由段与所述第一下自由段重合形成所述第一自由段,所述第二上自由段与所述第二下自由段重合形成所述第二自由段,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件相对所述第二切换件运动而使得所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,且所述第一轴体和/或所述第二轴体限位于所述锁止段,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the switching assembly includes a first switching member and a second switching member that cooperate with each other, and the first tank includes a first upper tank located on the first switching member and a first upper tank located on the first switching member. In the first lower tank body of the second switching member, the first free section includes a first upper free section located in the first upper tank body and a first lower free section located in the first lower tank body, The second tank body includes a second upper tank body located in the first switching member and a second lower tank body located in the second switching member, and the second free section includes a second upper tank body located in the The second upper free section and the second lower free section located in the second lower tank, when the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the first switching member and the The second switching member is relatively stationary, the first upper free section and the first lower free section overlap to form the first free section, and the second upper free section and the second lower free section overlap to form the first free section. In the second free section, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle, the first switching element moves relative to the second switching element so that the fourth axis The body is separated from the limiting section, and the first shaft body and/or the second shaft body is limited to the locking section, when the door body continues to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle During the process, the first switching element and the second switching element are relatively stationary.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述锁止段包括连通所述第一上自由段的第一上锁止段、连通所述第一下自由段的第一下锁止段、连通所述第二上自由段的第二上锁止段及连通所述第二下自由段的第二下锁止段,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体同时限位于所述第一上锁止段及所述第一下锁止段,所述第二轴体同时限位于所述第二上锁止段及所述第二下锁止段。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the locking section includes a first upper locking section communicating with the first upper free section, a first lower locking section communicating with the first lower free section, and a communicating station. The second upper locking section of the second upper free section and the second lower locking section communicating with the second lower free section, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle In the middle, the first shaft body is confined to the first upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time, and the second shaft body is confined to the second upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time. The second lower locking section.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一上锁止段与所述第一下锁止段始终相互错开,所述第二上锁止段与所述第二下锁止段始终相互错开。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first upper locking section and the first lower locking section are always mutually staggered, and the second upper locking section and the second lower locking section are always mutually offset. stagger.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第一间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第二间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第三间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第四间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第五间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第六间距,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一间距、所述第二间距及所述第三间距均呈减小趋势,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四间距、所述第五间距及所述第六间距均先呈增大趋势后保持不变。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, there is a first distance between the center of the first shaft and the side edges, and a second distance is between the center of the first shaft and the front wall, There is a third distance between the center of the first shaft and the side wall, a fourth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side edges, and the center of the third shaft is There is a fifth distance between the front walls, and a sixth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side walls. When the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, The first distance, the second distance, and the third distance all show a decreasing trend. When the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the fourth distance , The fifth distance and the sixth distance both show an increasing trend first and then remain unchanged.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件及所述第二切换件通过第五轴体相互配接,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体以所述第五轴体为圆心运动至所述锁止段。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first switching element and the second switching element are connected to each other through a fifth shaft body, and when the door body is at a first opening angle, it continues to open to a second opening angle During the process, the first shaft moves to the locking section with the fifth shaft as the center.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件相较于所述第二切换件靠近所述第一铰链件。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first switching element is closer to the first hinge element than the second switching element.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件包括所述第三轴体,所述第二切换件具有通孔,所述第三轴体通过所述通孔而延伸至所述第三槽体,所述第二切换件包括所述第四轴体,所述第四轴体延伸至所述第四槽体。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the first switching member includes the third shaft body, the second switching member has a through hole, and the third shaft body extends to the through hole through the through hole. The third groove body, the second switching member includes the fourth shaft body, and the fourth shaft body extends to the fourth groove body.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体包括开口及环绕所述开口设置的前端面,所述第一轴体与所述前端面之间具有第一距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述前端面之间具有第二距离,所述第二距离大于所述第一距离。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the box body includes an opening and a front end surface arranged around the opening, and there is a first distance between the first shaft body and the front end surface. In the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a second distance between the third shaft body and the front end surface, and the second distance is greater than the first distance.
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述冰箱还包括邻近铰链组件且在门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述第一轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第三距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第四距离,所述第四距离小于所述第三距离。As a further improvement of an embodiment of the present invention, the refrigerator further includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and there is a third distance between the first shaft body and the outer side surface, when When the door is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a fourth distance between the third shaft and the outer side surface, and the fourth distance is smaller than the third distance .
与现有技术相比,本发明的有益效果在于:本发明一实施方式的冰箱可提高门体开闭的自由度,且可产生多种运动轨迹以适应不同的应用场景。Compared with the prior art, the beneficial effect of the present invention is that the refrigerator according to an embodiment of the present invention can increase the degree of freedom of opening and closing the door body, and can generate a variety of motion tracks to adapt to different application scenarios.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1是本发明第一实施方式的冰箱立体图;Fig. 1 is a perspective view of a refrigerator according to a first embodiment of the present invention;
图2是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于关闭状态的第一视角立体图;2 is a first perspective view of the hinge assembly in the closed state of the first embodiment of the present invention;
图3至图5是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件第一视角不同状态爆炸图;3 to 5 are exploded views of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention in different states from a first perspective;
图6是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于关闭状态的第二视角立体图;Fig. 6 is a second perspective perspective view of the hinge assembly in the closed state of the first embodiment of the present invention;
图7至图9是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件第二视角不同状态爆炸图;Figures 7 to 9 are exploded views of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention in different states from a second perspective;
图10是本发明第一实施方式的冰箱处于闭合状态的俯视图;Figure 10 is a top view of the refrigerator in the first embodiment of the present invention in a closed state;
图11是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于闭合状态的立体图;Figure 11 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention in a closed state;
图12是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于闭合状态的俯视剖视图;Figure 12 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention in a closed state;
图13是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于闭合状态的仰视剖视图;Figure 13 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly in the closed state of the first embodiment of the present invention;
图14是本发明第一实施方式的冰箱处于第一中间开启角度的俯视图;14 is a top view of the refrigerator in the first embodiment of the present invention at a first intermediate opening angle;
图15是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第一中间开启角度的立体图;15 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first intermediate opening angle;
图16是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第一中间开启角度的俯视剖视图;16 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first intermediate opening angle;
图17是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第一中间开启角度的仰视剖视图;Figure 17 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first intermediate opening angle;
图18是本发明第一实施方式的冰箱处于第一开启角度的俯视图;18 is a top view of the refrigerator in the first embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle;
图19是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第一开启角度的立体图;19 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle;
图20是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第一开启角度的俯视剖视图;20 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle;
图21是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第一开启角度的仰视剖视图;Figure 21 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle;
图22是本发明第一实施方式的冰箱处于第二开启角度的俯视图;Figure 22 is a top view of the refrigerator in the first embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle;
图23是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第二开启角度的立体图;Figure 23 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle;
图24是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第二开启角度的俯视剖视图;24 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle;
图25是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第二开启角度的仰视剖视图;25 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle;
图26是本发明第一实施方式的冰箱处于最大开启角度的俯视图;Figure 26 is a top view of the refrigerator in the first embodiment of the present invention at a maximum opening angle;
图27是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于最大开启角度的立体图;Figure 27 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a maximum opening angle;
图28是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于最大开启角度的俯视剖视图;28 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a maximum opening angle;
图29是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于最大开启角度的仰视剖视图;Figure 29 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a maximum opening angle;
图30是本发明第一实施方式的冰箱全嵌入状态的示意图;FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram of a fully embedded state of the refrigerator according to the first embodiment of the present invention;
图31是本发明第一实施方式的门体下方的铰链组件立体图;31 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly under the door body of the first embodiment of the present invention;
图32是本发明第一实施方式的门体下方的铰链组件爆炸图;Figure 32 is an exploded view of the hinge assembly under the door in the first embodiment of the present invention;
图33是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于关闭状态的立体图;Figure 33 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention in a closed state;
图34至图36是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件不同状态爆炸图;Figures 34 to 36 are exploded views of the hinge assembly in different states of the second embodiment of the present invention;
图37是本发明第二实施方式的冰箱处于闭合状态的俯视图;Fig. 37 is a top view of the refrigerator in a closed state according to the second embodiment of the present invention;
图38是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于闭合状态的立体图;Figure 38 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention in a closed state;
图39是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于闭合状态的俯视剖视图;39 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly in the closed state of the second embodiment of the present invention;
图40是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于闭合状态的仰视剖视图;40 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly in the closed state of the second embodiment of the present invention;
图41是本发明第二实施方式的冰箱处于第一开启角度的俯视图;Figure 41 is a top view of the refrigerator in the second embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle;
图42是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于第一开启角度的立体图;Figure 42 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle;
图43是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于第一开启角度的俯视剖视图;Figure 43 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle;
图44是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于第一开启角度的仰视剖视图;Figure 44 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle;
图45是本发明第二实施方式的冰箱处于第二开启角度的俯视图;FIG. 45 is a top view of the refrigerator in the second embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle;
图46是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于第二开启角度的立体图;Figure 46 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle;
图47是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于第二开启角度的俯视剖视图;Fig. 47 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle;
图48是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于第二开启角度的仰视剖视图;Figure 48 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle;
图49是本发明第二实施方式的冰箱处于第二中间开启角度的俯视图;Fig. 49 is a top view of the refrigerator in the second embodiment of the present invention at a second intermediate opening angle;
图50是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于第二中间开启角度的立体图;Figure 50 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a second intermediate opening angle;
图51是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于第二中间开启角度的俯视剖视图;Figure 51 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a second intermediate opening angle;
图52是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于第二中间开启角度的仰视剖视图;52 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a second intermediate opening angle;
图53是本发明第二实施方式的冰箱处于最大开启角度的俯视图;FIG. 53 is a top view of the refrigerator in the second embodiment of the present invention at a maximum opening angle;
图54是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于最大开启角度的立体图;Figure 54 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at a maximum opening angle;
图55是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于最大开启角度的俯视剖视图;Figure 55 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at the maximum opening angle;
图56是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于最大开启角度的仰视剖视图;Figure 56 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention at the maximum opening angle;
图57是本发明一实施方式的带有走线模块的冰箱俯视图;Fig. 57 is a top view of a refrigerator with a wiring module according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图58是本发明一实施方式的带有走线模块的冰箱立体状态下局部放大图;FIG. 58 is a partial enlarged view of a refrigerator with a wiring module in a three-dimensional state according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图59是本发明一实施方式的带有走线模块的冰箱俯视状态下局部放大图(对应门体闭合状态);FIG. 59 is a partial enlarged view of a refrigerator with a wiring module in a top view state according to an embodiment of the present invention (corresponding to a closed state of the door);
图60是本发明一实施方式的带有走线模块的冰箱俯视状态下局部放大图(对应门体开启状态)。Fig. 60 is a partial enlarged view (corresponding to an open state of the door) of a refrigerator with a wiring module according to an embodiment of the present invention.
具体实施方式detailed description
以下将结合附图所示的具体实施方式对本发明进行详细描述。但这些实施方式并不限制本发明,本领域的普通技术人员根据这些实施方式所做出的结构、方法、或功能上的变换均包含在本发明的保护范围内。Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the specific embodiments shown in the drawings. However, these embodiments do not limit the present invention, and the structural, method, or functional changes made by those skilled in the art according to these embodiments are all included in the protection scope of the present invention.
在本发明的各个图示中,为了便于图示,结构或部分的某些尺寸会相对于其它结构或部分夸大,因此,仅用于图示本发明的主题的基本结构。In each illustration of the present invention, for the convenience of illustration, some dimensions of the structure or part are exaggerated relative to other structures or parts, and therefore, they are only used to illustrate the basic structure of the subject of the present invention.
另外,本文使用的例如“上”、“上方”、“下”、“下方”、“左”、“右”等表示空间相对位置的术语是出于便于说明的目的来描述如附图中所示的一个单元或特征相对于另一个单元或特征的关系。空间相对位置的术语可以旨在包括设备在使用或工作中除了图中所示方位以外的不同方位。例如,如果将图中的设备翻转,则被描述为位于其他单元或特征“下方”或“之下”的单元将位于其他单元或特征“上方”。因此,示例性术语“下方”可以囊括上方和下方这两种方位。设备可以以其他方式被定向(旋转90度或其他朝向),并相应地解释本文使用的与空间相关的描述语。In addition, terms such as "upper", "above", "below", "below", "left", "right" and the like used herein to indicate relative positions in space are used for the purpose of facilitating the description as shown in the accompanying drawings. Shows the relationship of one unit or feature with respect to another unit or feature. The terms of relative spatial position may be intended to include different orientations of the device in use or operation other than those shown in the figures. For example, if the device in the figure is turned over, the units described as being "below" or "below" other units or features will be "above" the other units or features. Therefore, the exemplary term "below" can encompass both the above and below orientations. The device can be oriented in other ways (rotated by 90 degrees or other orientations), and the space-related descriptors used herein are explained accordingly.
在本实施方式中,结合图1至图9,冰箱100包括箱体10、用以打开和关闭箱体10的门体20以及连接箱体10及门体20的铰链组件30。In this embodiment, in conjunction with FIGS. 1 to 9, the refrigerator 100 includes a box body 10, a door body 20 for opening and closing the box body 10, and a hinge assembly 30 connecting the box body 10 and the door body 20.
箱体10包括容纳腔室S及连接铰链组件30的枢转侧P。The box body 10 includes a receiving chamber S and a pivot side P connected to the hinge assembly 30.
铰链组件30包括第一铰链件31、第二铰链件32以及连接第一铰链件31及第二铰链件32的切换组件40。The hinge assembly 30 includes a first hinge part 31, a second hinge part 32, and a switching assembly 40 connecting the first hinge part 31 and the second hinge part 32.
当门体20处于开启过程中时,第一铰链件31先相对切换组件40运动,而后第二铰链件32相对切换组件40运动,其中,铰链组件30先驱动门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动,再驱动门体20由容纳腔室S朝向枢转侧P移动,而后再驱动门体20相对箱体10继续原地转动。When the door body 20 is in the process of opening, the first hinge member 31 first moves relative to the switch assembly 40, and then the second hinge member 32 moves relative to the switch assembly 40, wherein the hinge assembly 30 first drives the door body 20 from the pivoting side P toward The accommodating chamber S moves, and then the door body 20 is driven to move from the accommodating chamber S toward the pivoting side P, and then the door body 20 is driven to continue to rotate in place relative to the box body 10.
这里,通过门体20相对箱体10原地转动可有效避免因门体20某个方向的位移而导致门体20无法正常开启,通过门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动可避免门体20在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉,适用于嵌入式橱柜或容纳冰箱100的空间较小的场景,通过门体20由容纳腔室S朝向枢转侧P移动可使得门体20尽量远离箱体10,保证箱体10的开度,避免箱体10内的抽屉、搁物架等受门体20干涉而无法打开的问题,而通过门体20相对箱体10继续转动可进一步提高门体的最大开启角度。Here, the in-situ rotation of the door body 20 relative to the box body 10 can effectively prevent the door body 20 from being unable to open normally due to the displacement of the door body 20 in a certain direction. The door body 20 can be moved from the pivoting side P toward the accommodation chamber S. Avoid the door body 20 from interfering with the surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process. It is suitable for embedded cabinets or scenes where the refrigerator 100 has a small space. The door body 20 moves from the accommodating chamber S to the pivoting side P. The door body 20 can be kept as far away from the box body 10 as possible to ensure the opening of the box body 10, and avoid the problem that the drawers and shelves in the box body 10 cannot be opened due to the interference of the door body 20, and the door body 20 is opposite to the box body. 10 Continue to turn to further increase the maximum opening angle of the door.
另外,本实施方式通过切换组件33可实现第一铰链件31与第二铰链件32之间的切换工作,第一铰链件31及第二铰链件32分别可实现原地转动、由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动、由容纳腔室S朝向枢转侧P移动及继续原地转动中的部分功能,且在本实施方式中,由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动、由容纳腔室S朝向枢转侧P移动及继续原地转动是依序逐个完成的。In addition, in this embodiment, the switching between the first hinge part 31 and the second hinge part 32 can be realized by the switching assembly 33, and the first hinge part 31 and the second hinge part 32 can respectively realize in-situ rotation and rotation from the pivot side. P moves toward the accommodation chamber S, moves from the accommodation chamber S to the pivoting side P, and continues to rotate part of the function. In this embodiment, the pivoting side P moves toward the accommodation chamber S and is moved by the accommodation chamber S. The movement of the chamber S toward the pivoting side P and the continued rotation in place are completed one by one in order.
在本实施方式中,第一铰链件31固定于箱体10,第二铰链件32固定于门体20,切换组件40包括第一配合件41及第二配合件42,第一铰链件31与第二铰链件32有多种组合方式。In this embodiment, the first hinge part 31 is fixed to the box body 10, the second hinge part 32 is fixed to the door body 20, and the switching assembly 40 includes a first matching part 41 and a second matching part 42, the first hinge part 31 and The second hinge member 32 has various combinations.
在第一种组合方式中,当门体20处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一铰链件31与第一配合件41相对运动而驱动门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动,而后第一铰链件31与第一配合件41相对运动而驱动门体20由容纳腔室S朝向枢转侧P移动,且第二配合件42限位第二铰链件32,当门体20处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第二铰链件32脱离第二配合件42的限位,且第一配合件41限位第一铰链件31,当门体20处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第二铰链件32与第二配合件42相对运动而驱动门体20继续原地转动。In the first combination, when the door body 20 is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle α1, the first hinge member 31 and the first matching member 41 move relative to each other to drive the door body 20 from the pivoting side. P moves toward the accommodating chamber S, and then the first hinge member 31 and the first matching member 41 move relatively to drive the door 20 to move from the accommodating chamber S toward the pivot side P, and the second matching member 42 limits the second hinge A member 32, when the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle α1 to the second opening angle α2, the second hinge member 32 is separated from the limit of the second matching member 42, and the first matching member 41 is limited The first hinge member 31, when the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle α2 to the maximum opening angle α3, the second hinge member 32 and the second matching member 42 move relative to each other to drive the door body 20 to continue in place Rotate.
也就是说,本示例的第一铰链件31与第一配合件41配合而依次实现门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动及门体20由容纳腔室S朝向枢转侧P移动,第二铰链件32与第二配合件42配合而实现门体20继续原地转动,其中,切换组件40通过锁止解锁功能可实现第一铰链件31先工作,第二铰链件32后工作。That is to say, the first hinge part 31 of this example cooperates with the first matching part 41 to sequentially realize the movement of the door body 20 from the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S and the door body 20 from the accommodating chamber S toward the pivoting side P. Move, the second hinge member 32 cooperates with the second matching member 42 to realize that the door body 20 continues to rotate in situ. The switch assembly 40 can realize that the first hinge member 31 works first and the second hinge member 32 follows through the locking and unlocking function. jobs.
在第二种组合方式中,当门体20处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一铰链件31与第一配合件41相对运动而驱动门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动,且第二配合件42限位第二铰链件32,当门体20处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第二铰链件32脱离第二配合件42的限位,且第一配合件41限位第一铰链件31,当门体20处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第二铰链件32与第二配合件42相对运动而驱动门体20由容纳腔室S朝向枢转侧P移动,而后第二铰链件32与第二配合件42相对运动而驱动门体20继续原地转动。In the second combination mode, when the door body 20 is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle α1, the first hinge member 31 and the first matching member 41 move relative to each other to drive the door body 20 from the pivoting side. P moves toward the accommodating chamber S, and the second matching member 42 limits the second hinge member 32. When the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle α1 to the second opening angle α2, the second hinge member 32 is disengaged from the limit of the second matching member 42, and the first matching member 41 limits the first hinge member 31. When the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle α2 to the maximum opening angle α3, the second The hinge member 32 and the second matching member 42 move relative to each other to drive the door body 20 to move from the accommodating chamber S toward the pivot side P, and then the second hinge member 32 and the second matching member 42 move relative to each other to drive the door body 20 to continue in place Rotate.
也就是说,本示例的第一铰链件31与第一配合件41配合而依次实现门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动,第二铰链件32与第二配合件42配合而依次实现门体20由容纳腔室S朝向枢转侧P移动及门体20继续原地转动,其中,切换组件40通过锁止解锁功能可实现第一铰链件31先工作,第二铰链件32后工作。That is to say, the first hinge part 31 of this example cooperates with the first matching part 41 to sequentially realize the movement of the door body 20 from the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S, and the second hinge part 32 cooperates with the second matching part 42. The door body 20 moves from the accommodating chamber S toward the pivoting side P and the door body 20 continues to rotate in situ. The switching assembly 40 can realize the first hinge member 31 to work first and the second hinge member 32 through the lock and unlock function. After work.
下面,以第一种组合方式作为第一实施方式具体说明本发明的冰箱100,且冰箱100以多门冰箱100为例。Hereinafter, the refrigerator 100 of the present invention is described in detail by taking the first combination manner as the first embodiment, and the refrigerator 100 is a multi-door refrigerator 100 as an example.
结合图1,为本发明第一实施方式的冰箱100示意图。In conjunction with FIG. 1, it is a schematic diagram of a refrigerator 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
冰箱100包括箱体10、用以打开和关闭箱体10的门体20以及连接箱体10及门体20的铰链组件30。The refrigerator 100 includes a box body 10, a door body 20 for opening and closing the box body 10, and a hinge assembly 30 connecting the box body 10 and the door body 20.
需要强调的是,本实施方式的结构不仅适用于带有铰链组件30的对开门冰箱100,也可适用于其他场景,例如橱柜、酒柜、衣柜等等,本发明以对开门冰箱100为例作说明,但不以此为限。It should be emphasized that the structure of this embodiment is not only applicable to the side-by-side refrigerator 100 with the hinge assembly 30, but also applicable to other scenes, such as cabinets, wine cabinets, wardrobes, etc., the present invention takes the side-by-side refrigerator 100 as an example For illustration, but not limited to this.
箱体10包括容纳腔室S及连接铰链组件30的枢转侧P。The box body 10 includes a receiving chamber S and a pivot side P connected to the hinge assembly 30.
这里,“枢转侧P”定义为门体20相对箱体10转动的区域,即设置有铰链组件30的区域,枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S的方向定义为第一方向X,容纳腔室S朝向枢转侧P的方向定义为第二方向Y。Here, the “pivoting side P” is defined as the area where the door body 20 rotates relative to the box body 10, that is, the area where the hinge assembly 30 is provided. The direction of the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S is defined as the first direction X, the accommodating cavity The direction of the chamber S toward the pivoting side P is defined as the second direction Y.
结合图2至图9,铰链组件30包括固定于箱体10的第一铰链件31、固定于门体20的第二铰链件32以及连接第一铰链件31及第二铰链件32的切换组件40。2-9, the hinge assembly 30 includes a first hinge member 31 fixed to the box body 10, a second hinge member 32 fixed to the door body 20, and a switching assembly connecting the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32 40.
第一铰链件31与切换组件40之间通过相互配合的第一轴体组311、312及第一槽体组411、412实现相对运动,第一轴体组311、312包括第一轴体311及第二轴体312,第一槽体组411、412包括第一自由段S1、第二自由段S2及锁止段4132、4142、4152、4162,第一自由段S1包括相对设置的初始位置A1及停止位置A2,第二自由段S2包括相连的第一段L1及第二段L2。The first hinge member 31 and the switching assembly 40 realize relative movement through the first shaft body groups 311, 312 and the first groove body groups 411, 412 that cooperate with each other, and the first shaft body groups 311 and 312 include the first shaft body 311 And the second shaft 312, the first slot group 411, 412 includes a first free section S1, a second free section S2, and a locking section 4132, 4142, 4152, 4162, the first free section S1 includes an initial position that is relatively set A1 and the stop position A2, the second free section S2 includes the first section L1 and the second section L2 that are connected.
第二铰链件32与切换组件40之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组321、322及第二槽体组421、422实现相对运动,第二轴体组321、322包括第三轴体321及第四轴体322,第二槽体组421、422包括第三自由段421、第四自由段4221及限位段4222。The second hinge member 32 and the switching assembly 40 realize relative movement through the mutually matched second shaft groups 321, 322 and the second groove body groups 421, 422. The second shaft groups 321, 322 include the third shaft body 321. And the fourth shaft 322, the second slot group 421, 422 includes a third free section 421, a fourth free section 4221, and a limiting section 4222.
当门体20处于关闭状态时(可参考图10至图13),第一轴体311位于初始位置A1,第二轴体312位于第一段L1远离第二段L2的一端,且第四轴体322位于限位段4222而使得切换组件40限位第二铰链件32。When the door 20 is in the closed state (refer to Figures 10 to 13), the first shaft 311 is located at the initial position A1, the second shaft 312 is located at the end of the first section L1 away from the second section L2, and the fourth shaft The body 322 is located in the limiting section 4222 so that the switching assembly 40 limits the second hinge member 32.
当门体20处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时(可参考图14至图21),第二轴体312于第一段L1内运动而带动第一轴体311由初始位置A1运动至停止位置A2,门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动,而后第二轴体312于第二段L2内运动而带动第一轴体311由停止位置A2朝向初始位置A1运动,门体20由容纳腔室S朝向枢转侧P移动。When the door 20 is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle α1 (refer to FIGS. 14 to 21), the second shaft 312 moves in the first section L1 to drive the first shaft 311 from the initial The position A1 moves to the stop position A2, the door 20 moves from the pivoting side P toward the containing chamber S, and then the second shaft 312 moves in the second section L2 to drive the first shaft 311 from the stop position A2 to the initial position A1 moves, and the door body 20 moves from the accommodating chamber S toward the pivoting side P.
具体的,当门体20处于由关闭状态开启至第一中间开启角度α11的过程中时(可参考图14至图17),第二轴体312于第一段L1内运动而带动第一轴体311由初始位置A1运动至停止位置A2,门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动。Specifically, when the door body 20 is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first intermediate opening angle α11 (refer to FIGS. 14 to 17), the second shaft body 312 moves in the first section L1 to drive the first shaft The body 311 moves from the initial position A1 to the stop position A2, and the door body 20 moves from the pivoting side P toward the accommodation chamber S.
这里,当门体20处于由关闭状态开启至第一中间开启角度α11的过程中时,门体20朝向容纳腔室S的一侧移动,即此时门体20既相对箱体10发生转动又相对箱体10沿第一方向X产生了位移,如此,门体20在转动过程中朝远离容纳腔室S的一侧凸伸出箱体10的距离会大大减小,即门体20沿第一方向X产生的位移抵消了门体20转动过程中沿第二方向Y凸伸出箱体10的部分,从而避免门体20在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉,适用于嵌入式橱柜或容纳冰箱100的空间较小的场景。Here, when the door body 20 is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first intermediate opening angle α11, the door body 20 moves toward the side of the accommodating chamber S, that is, at this time, the door body 20 both rotates relative to the box body 10 and The relative box body 10 is displaced in the first direction X. Thus, the distance that the door body 20 protrudes from the box body 10 toward the side away from the containing chamber S during the rotation process will be greatly reduced, that is, the door body 20 is along the first direction. The displacement produced in one direction X offsets the part that protrudes from the box body 10 in the second direction Y during the rotation of the door body 20, thereby avoiding the door body 20 from interfering with the surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process, and is suitable for Built-in cabinets or a scene where the space for accommodating the refrigerator 100 is small.
当门体20处于由第一中间开启角度α11开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时(可参考图18至图21),第二轴体312于第二段L2内运动而带动第一轴体311由停止位置A2朝向初始位置A1运动,门体20由容纳腔室S朝向枢转侧P移动。When the door body 20 is in the process of opening from the first intermediate opening angle α11 to the first opening angle α1 (refer to FIGS. 18-21), the second shaft body 312 moves in the second section L2 to drive the first shaft The body 311 moves from the stop position A2 toward the initial position A1, and the door body 20 moves from the accommodating chamber S toward the pivot side P.
这里,当门体20处于由第一中间开启角度α11开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,门体20朝向枢转侧P的一侧移动,即此时门体20既相对箱体10发生转动又相对箱体10沿第二方向Y产生了位移,如此,可使得门体20尽量远离箱体10,保证箱体10的开度,避免箱体10内的抽屉、搁物架等受门体20干涉而无法打开的问题。Here, when the door body 20 is in the process of opening from the first intermediate opening angle α11 to the first opening angle α1, the door body 20 moves toward the side of the pivoting side P, that is, the door body 20 is opposite to the box body 10 at this time. When the rotation occurs, it is displaced in the second direction Y relative to the box body 10. In this way, the door body 20 can be kept as far away from the box body 10 as possible to ensure the opening of the box body 10 and avoid the drawers, shelves, etc. in the box body 10 from being affected. The door body 20 interferes and cannot be opened.
当门体20处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时(可参考图22至图25),第四轴体322脱离限位段4222,且第一轴体311和/或第二轴体312限位于锁止段4132、4142、4152、4162而使得切换组件40限位第一铰链件31。When the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle α1 to the second opening angle α2 (refer to FIGS. 22 to 25), the fourth shaft body 322 is separated from the limiting section 4222, and the first shaft body 311 And/or the second shaft body 312 is confined to the locking segments 4132, 4142, 4152, 4162, so that the switching assembly 40 constrains the first hinge member 31.
当门体20处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时(可参考图26至图29),第三轴体321于第三自由段421内原地转动,第四轴体322以第三轴体321为圆心而于第四自由段4221运动,门体20相对箱体10继续原地转动。When the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle α2 to the maximum opening angle α3 (refer to Figures 26 to 29), the third shaft body 321 rotates in situ in the third free section 421, and the fourth shaft The body 322 moves in the fourth free section 4221 with the third shaft body 321 as the center, and the door body 20 continues to rotate in situ relative to the box body 10.
继续结合图1至图9,第一铰链件31包括第一轴体311及第二轴体322,切换组件40包括具有第一自由段S1的第一槽体411、具有第二自由段S2的第二槽体412、第三轴体321及第四轴体322,第二铰链件32包括具有第三自由段421的第三槽体421及具有第四自由段4221的第四槽体422。Continuing to combine FIGS. 1 to 9, the first hinge member 31 includes a first shaft body 311 and a second shaft body 322, and the switching assembly 40 includes a first groove body 411 having a first free section S1, and a second free section S2. The second groove body 412, the third shaft body 321 and the fourth shaft body 322, the second hinge member 32 includes a third groove body 421 with a third free section 421 and a fourth groove body 422 with a fourth free section 4221.
在本实施方式中,第一配合件41及第二配合件42具体为相互配合的第一切换件401及第二切换件402,即切换组件40包括相互配合的第一切换件401及第二切换件402,但不以此为限。第一槽体411包括位于第一切换件401的第一上槽体413及位于第二切换件402的第一下槽体414,第一自由段S1包括位于第一上槽体413的第一上自由段4131及位于第一下槽体414的第一下自由段4141。In this embodiment, the first matching member 41 and the second matching member 42 are specifically a first switching member 401 and a second switching member 402 that cooperate with each other, that is, the switching assembly 40 includes a first switching member 401 and a second switching member 401 that cooperate with each other. The switch 402 is not limited to this. The first tank 411 includes a first upper tank 413 located on the first switching member 401 and a first lower tank 414 located on the second switching member 402. The first free section S1 includes a first upper tank 413 located on the first upper tank 413. The upper free section 4131 and the first lower free section 4141 located in the first lower tank 414.
第二槽体412包括位于第一切换件401的第二上槽体415及位于第二切换件402的第二下槽体416,第二自由段S2包括位于第二上槽体415的第二上自由段4151及位于第二下槽体416的第二下自由段4161。The second tank 412 includes a second upper tank 415 located in the first switching member 401 and a second lower tank 416 located in the second switching member 402, and the second free section S2 includes a second upper tank 415 located in the second upper tank 415. The upper free section 4151 and the second lower free section 4161 located in the second lower tank 416.
锁止段4132、4142、4152、4162包括连通第一上自由段4131的第一上锁止段4132、连通第一下自由段4141的第一下锁止段4142、连通第二上自由段4151的第二上锁止段4152及连通第二下自由段4161的第二下锁止段4162。The locking section 4132, 4142, 4152, 4162 includes a first upper locking section 4132 connected to the first upper free section 4131, a first lower locking section 4142 connected to the first lower free section 4141, and a second upper free section 4151 The second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section 4162 communicating with the second lower free section 4161.
第一上锁止段4132与第一下锁止段4142始终相互错开,第二上锁止段4152与第二下锁止段4162始终相互错开。The first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142 are always staggered from each other, and the second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section 4162 are always staggered from each other.
这里,“始终相互错开”是指在门体20开启过程中,第一上锁止段4132与第一下锁止段4142不会出现完全重合的状态,第二上锁止段4152与第二下锁止段4162也不会出现完全重合的状态。Here, "always staggered with each other" means that during the opening process of the door body 20, the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142 will not completely overlap, and the second upper locking section 4152 and the second upper locking section 4152 will not completely overlap with each other. The lower locking section 4162 will not completely overlap.
在本实施方式中,第一切换件401相较于第二切换件402靠近第一铰链件31,即第一铰链件31、第一切换件401、第二切换件402及第二铰链件32之间依次叠置。In this embodiment, the first switching element 401 is closer to the first hinge element 31 than the second switching element 402, that is, the first hinge element 31, the first switching element 401, the second switching element 402, and the second hinge element 32 Stacked in turn.
结合图5及图9,铰链组件30还包括第一铆接片4111及第二铆接片4121,当第一轴体311延伸至第一槽体411中时,第一铆接片4111位于第二切换件402的下方并套接第一轴体311,如此可避免第一轴体311脱离第一槽体411,同样的,当第二轴体312延伸至第二槽体412中时,第二铆接片4121位于第二切换件402的下方并套接第二轴体312,如此可避免第二轴体312脱离第二槽体412。5 and 9, the hinge assembly 30 further includes a first riveting piece 4111 and a second riveting piece 4121. When the first shaft body 311 extends into the first groove body 411, the first riveting piece 4111 is located at the second switching member The first shaft body 311 is sleeved under 402, so that the first shaft body 311 can be prevented from detaching from the first groove body 411. Similarly, when the second shaft body 312 extends into the second groove body 412, the second riveting piece The 4121 is located under the second switching member 402 and is sleeved with the second shaft 312, so that the second shaft 312 can be prevented from being separated from the second groove 412.
第一切换件401及第二切换件402通过第五轴体50相互配接。The first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are mated with each other through the fifth shaft body 50.
这里,第一切换件401及第二切换件402上设置有第一贯穿孔4014及第二贯穿孔4024,独立的铆接件作为第五轴体50穿过第一贯穿孔4014及第二贯穿孔4024。Here, the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are provided with a first through hole 4014 and a second through hole 4024, and an independent riveting element as a fifth shaft 50 passes through the first through hole 4014 and the second through hole 4024.
具体的,第五轴体50包括铆接柱51及铆接柱垫片52,铆接柱51具有较大尺寸的一端位于第二贯穿孔4024的下方,铆接柱51具有较小尺寸的一端依次延伸至第二贯穿孔4024及第一贯穿孔4014中,而铆接柱垫片52位于第一贯穿孔4014上方并与铆接柱51配合而锁止铆接柱51。Specifically, the fifth shaft body 50 includes a riveting post 51 and a riveting post washer 52. The end of the riveting post 51 with a larger size is located below the second through hole 4024, and the end of the riveting post 51 with a smaller size extends to the first through hole 4024 in turn. In the two through holes 4024 and the first through hole 4014, the riveting post gasket 52 is located above the first through hole 4014 and cooperates with the riveting post 51 to lock the riveting post 51.
如此,可实现第一切换件401及第二切换件402的相互配接,即可实现第一切换件401及第二切换件402的相对运动,且第一切换件401及第二切换件402不会相互分离。In this way, the mutual mating of the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 can be realized, and the relative movement of the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 can be realized, and the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 can be realized. Will not be separated from each other.
需要说明的是,第一贯穿孔4014及第二贯穿孔4024与第五轴体50相互匹配,第一切换件401相对第二切换件402原地转动。It should be noted that the first through hole 4014 and the second through hole 4024 are matched with the fifth shaft body 50, and the first switching member 401 rotates in situ relative to the second switching member 402.
在其他实施方式中,可以在第一切换件401及第二切换件402的其中之一上设置贯穿孔,其中另一上设置第五轴体50,通过第五轴体50与贯穿孔的配合实现第一切换件401与第二切换件402的相互配接,但不以此为限。In other embodiments, a through hole may be provided on one of the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402, and a fifth shaft 50 is provided on the other, and the fifth shaft 50 is matched with the through hole. The mutual mating of the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 is realized, but not limited to this.
另外,第一切换件401包括第三轴体321,第二切换件402具有通孔4026,第三轴体321通过通孔4026而延伸至第三槽体421,第二切换件402包括第四轴体322,第四轴体322延伸至第四槽体422。In addition, the first switching member 401 includes a third shaft body 321, the second switching member 402 has a through hole 4026, the third shaft body 321 extends to the third groove body 421 through the through hole 4026, and the second switching member 402 includes a fourth The shaft 322, and the fourth shaft 322 extends to the fourth slot 422.
这里,通孔4026的尺寸可大于第三轴体321的尺寸,如此,可使得第三轴体321于通孔4026内活动,当第一切换件401与第二切换件402相对运动时,可避免通孔4026与第三轴体321相互干涉。Here, the size of the through hole 4026 may be larger than the size of the third shaft body 321. In this way, the third shaft body 321 can be moved in the through hole 4026. When the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402 move relative to each other, Avoid mutual interference between the through hole 4026 and the third shaft body 321.
也就是说,本实施方式的第三轴体321及第四轴体322位于不同的切换件,但不以此为限。That is to say, the third shaft body 321 and the fourth shaft body 322 of this embodiment are located in different switching elements, but not limited to this.
在本实施方式中,结合图5及图9,第一切换件401包括依次叠置的第一衬片4011、第一滑片4012及第一衬套4013,第二切换片402包括依次叠置的第二衬片4021、第二滑片4022及第二衬套4023。In this embodiment, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 9, the first switching member 401 includes a first lining 4011, a first sliding plate 4012, and a first bushing 4013 that are sequentially stacked, and the second switching member 402 includes sequentially stacked The second lining 4021, the second sliding piece 4022, and the second bushing 4023.
这里,第一铰链件31、第一衬片4011、第一滑片4012、第一衬套4013、第二衬片4021、第二滑片4022、第二衬套4023及第二铰链件32由上到下依次叠置。Here, the first hinge member 31, the first lining 4011, the first sliding piece 4012, the first bushing 4013, the second lining 4021, the second sliding piece 4022, the second bushing 4023, and the second hinge member 32 are composed of Stacked one by one from top to bottom.
第一衬片4011、第一衬套4013、第二衬片4021及第二衬套4023为塑料材质,例如为聚甲醛(polyformldehyde,POM)等。The first liner 4011, the first liner 4013, the second liner 4021, and the second liner 4023 are made of plastic material, such as polyformaldehyde (POM).
第一滑片4012及第二滑片4022为金属材质,例如为不锈钢或Q235钢等。The first sliding piece 4012 and the second sliding piece 4022 are made of metal, such as stainless steel or Q235 steel.
第一衬片4011、第一滑片4012及第一衬套4013的外轮廓相互匹配,第一衬片4011与第一衬套4013相互配合而将第一滑片4012夹设于两者之间,且第一衬片4011、第一滑片4012及第一衬套4013上均需要设置槽孔以配合形成第一上槽体413、第二上槽体415及第一贯穿孔4014。The outer contours of the first lining 4011, the first sliding piece 4012, and the first bushing 4013 match each other. The first lining 4011 and the first bushing 4013 cooperate with each other to sandwich the first sliding piece 4012 between the two , And the first lining 4011, the first sliding piece 4012, and the first bushing 4013 all need to be provided with slots to cooperate to form the first upper groove 413, the second upper groove 415, and the first through hole 4014.
这里,可仅在第一滑片4012及第一衬套4013上形成槽孔而形成第一贯穿孔4014,即第一贯穿孔4014未贯穿第一衬片4011,此时,第五轴体50从第一切换件401的下方延伸至第一贯穿孔4011中,而第一衬片4011可遮蔽第一贯穿孔4014及第五轴体50,提高美观度。Here, the first through hole 4014 may be formed by only forming slots on the first sliding piece 4012 and the first bushing 4013, that is, the first through hole 4014 does not penetrate the first lining piece 4011, at this time, the fifth shaft body 50 It extends from below the first switching member 401 to the first through hole 4011, and the first lining 4011 can shield the first through hole 4014 and the fifth shaft 50 to improve the aesthetics.
第二衬片4021、第二滑片4022及第二衬套4023的外轮廓相互匹配,第二衬片4021与第二衬套4023相互配合而将第二滑片4022夹设于两者之间,且第二衬片4021、第二滑片4022及第二衬套4023上均需要设置槽孔以配合形成第一下槽体414、第二下槽体416及第二贯穿孔4024。The outer contours of the second lining 4021, the second sliding piece 4022, and the second bushing 4023 match each other, and the second lining 4021 and the second bushing 4023 cooperate with each other to sandwich the second sliding piece 4022 between the two , And the second lining 4021, the second sliding piece 4022 and the second bushing 4023 all need to be provided with slots to cooperate to form the first lower groove body 414, the second lower groove body 416 and the second through hole 4024.
这里,可仅在第二衬片4021及第二滑片4022上形成槽孔而形成第二贯穿孔4024,即第二贯穿孔4024未贯穿第二衬套4023,此时,第五轴体50从第二衬套4023的下方延伸至第二贯穿孔4024及第一贯穿孔4011中,而第二衬套4023可遮蔽第二贯穿孔4024及第五轴体50,提高美观度。Here, the second through hole 4024 may be formed by only forming slots on the second lining 4021 and the second sliding piece 4022, that is, the second through hole 4024 does not penetrate the second bushing 4023. At this time, the fifth shaft body 50 It extends from below the second bush 4023 to the second through hole 4024 and the first through hole 4011, and the second bush 4023 can shield the second through hole 4024 and the fifth shaft 50 to improve the aesthetics.
此时,第五轴体50的铆接柱51的一端可限位于第二衬套4023中,进一步提高第二衬片4021、第二滑片4022及第二衬套4023的配合效果。At this time, one end of the riveting column 51 of the fifth shaft body 50 can be limited to the second bushing 4023 to further improve the matching effect of the second bushing 4021, the second sliding piece 4022 and the second bushing 4023.
在本实施方式中,第一切换件401还包括包覆第一衬片4011、第一滑片4012及第一衬套4013周缘的第一装饰片4015,第二切换件402还包括包覆第二衬片4021、第二滑片4022及第二衬套4023周缘的第二装饰片4025,第一装饰片4015与第二装饰片4025相互分离。In this embodiment, the first switching element 401 further includes a first decorative sheet 4015 covering the periphery of the first lining 4011, the first sliding sheet 4012, and the first bushing 4013, and the second switching element 402 further includes covering the first lining 4011. The two lining pieces 4021, the second sliding piece 4022, and the second decoration piece 4025 on the periphery of the second bushing 4023, the first decoration piece 4015 and the second decoration piece 4025 are separated from each other.
这里,“第一装饰片4015与第二装饰片4025相互分离””是指第一装饰片4015与第二装饰片4025为相互独立的结构,当第一切换件401与第二切换件402相对运动时,第一装饰片4015与第二装饰片4025也会产生相对运动。Here, "the first decorative sheet 4015 and the second decorative sheet 4025 are separated from each other" means that the first decorative sheet 4015 and the second decorative sheet 4025 are mutually independent structures, when the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are opposite to each other. When moving, the first decorative piece 4015 and the second decorative piece 4025 will also move relative to each other.
另外,本实施方式的第一装饰片4015呈“门”字型,即第一装饰片4015仅包覆第一切换件401的三个侧面,便于第一装饰片4015的组装,且可在这三个侧面处设置卡扣结构而实现与第一装饰片4015的配合,于第一切换件401与第二切换件402的叠加方向上,第一装饰片4015的宽度大致等于第一衬片4011、第一滑片4012及第一衬套4013的厚度之和。In addition, the first decorative sheet 4015 of this embodiment is in the shape of a "door", that is, the first decorative sheet 4015 only covers the three sides of the first switching member 401, which facilitates the assembly of the first decorative sheet 4015 and can be installed here. The three sides are provided with buckle structures to achieve the cooperation with the first decorative sheet 4015. In the direction of superimposing the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402, the width of the first decorative sheet 4015 is approximately equal to the first lining 4011 , The sum of the thickness of the first sliding piece 4012 and the first bushing 4013.
同样的,第二装饰片4025呈“门”字型,即第二装饰片4025仅包覆第二切换件402的三个侧面,便于第二装饰片4025的组装,且可在这三个侧面处设置卡扣结构而实现与第二装饰片4025的配合,于第一切换件401与第二切换件402的叠加方向上,第二装饰片4025的宽度大致等于第二衬片4021、第二滑片4022及第二衬套4023的厚度之和。Similarly, the second decorative sheet 4025 is in the shape of a "door", that is, the second decorative sheet 4025 only covers the three sides of the second switching member 402, which facilitates the assembly of the second decorative sheet 4025 and can be installed on these three sides. A buckle structure is provided at the position to achieve the cooperation with the second decorative sheet 4025. In the superimposing direction of the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402, the width of the second decorative sheet 4025 is approximately equal to the second lining 4021 and the second The sum of the thickness of the sliding piece 4022 and the second bushing 4023.
第一装饰片4015及第二装饰片4025可由ABS(AcrylonitrileButdieneStyrene)塑料制成。The first decorative sheet 4015 and the second decorative sheet 4025 may be made of ABS (Acrylonitrile Butdiene Styrene) plastic.
下面,介绍铰链组件30的具体工作流程。Next, the specific working process of the hinge assembly 30 is introduced.
在本实施方式中,箱体10包括邻近铰链组件30且在门体20转动路径延伸段上的外侧面13,门体20包括远离容纳腔室S的前壁21及始终夹设于前壁21及容纳腔室S之间的侧壁22,前壁21与侧壁22之间具有侧棱23。In this embodiment, the box body 10 includes an outer side surface 13 adjacent to the hinge assembly 30 and on the extension section of the rotation path of the door body 20. The door body 20 includes a front wall 21 away from the containing chamber S and is always sandwiched on the front wall 21 The side wall 22 between the accommodating chamber S and the front wall 21 has a side edge 23 between the front wall 21 and the side wall 22.
结合图10至图13,当门体20处于关闭状态时,第一切换件401与第二切换件402相对静止,第一上自由段4131与第一下自由段4141重合形成第一自由段S1,第二上自由段4151与第二下自由段4161重合形成第二自由段S2,第一轴体311位于初始位置A1,第二轴体312位于第一段L1远离第二段L2的一端。10-13, when the door 20 is in the closed state, the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402 are relatively stationary, and the first upper free section 4131 and the first lower free section 4141 overlap to form a first free section S1 , The second upper free section 4151 and the second lower free section 4161 overlap to form a second free section S2, the first shaft 311 is located at the initial position A1, and the second shaft 312 is located at the end of the first section L1 away from the second section L2.
具体的,外侧面13与侧壁22位于同一平面,可以保证外观上的流畅性,提高美观度,且也便于门体20的安装,但不以此为限。Specifically, the outer side surface 13 and the side wall 22 are located on the same plane, which can ensure the smoothness of the appearance, improve the aesthetics, and also facilitate the installation of the door body 20, but it is not limited to this.
结合图14至图17,当门体20处于由关闭状态开启至第一中间开启角度α11的过程中时,第一切换件401与第二切换件402相对静止,第一上自由段4131与第一下自由段4141重合形成第一自由段S1,第二上自由段4151与第二下自由段4161重合形成第二自由段S2,第二轴体312于第一段L1内运动而带动第一轴体311由初始位置A1运动至停止位置A2,门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动。14-17, when the door body 20 is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first intermediate opening angle α11, the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402 are relatively stationary, and the first upper free section 4131 and the first upper free section 4131 are relatively static. The lower free section 4141 overlaps to form the first free section S1. The second upper free section 4151 and the second lower free section 4161 overlap to form the second free section S2. The second shaft 312 moves in the first section L1 to drive the first free section S1. The shaft body 311 moves from the initial position A1 to the stop position A2, and the door body 20 moves from the pivoting side P toward the containing chamber S.
这里,侧棱23运动至位于外侧面13靠近容纳腔室S的一侧,也就是说,此时铰链组件30驱动侧棱23朝靠近容纳腔室S的一侧移动,在门体20打开过程中,可以避免因侧棱23凸伸出外侧面13而与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉。Here, the side edge 23 moves to the side of the outer side surface 13 close to the receiving chamber S, that is, at this time, the hinge assembly 30 drives the side edge 23 to move to the side close to the receiving chamber S, and the door 20 is opened during the opening process. In this way, it is possible to avoid interference with surrounding cabinets or walls due to the side ribs 23 protruding from the outer side surface 13.
这里,为了尽量保证箱体10的开度,避免箱体10内的抽屉、搁物架等受门体20干涉而无法打开的问题,侧棱23朝靠近容纳腔室S的一侧移动至外侧面13所在的平面内之后,铰链组件30驱动侧棱23于该平面内运动并逐渐靠近容纳腔室S。Here, in order to ensure the opening degree of the box body 10 as much as possible and avoid the problem that drawers, shelves, etc. in the box body 10 cannot be opened due to the interference of the door body 20, the side ribs 23 are moved to the side close to the accommodating chamber S to the outside. After the side surface 13 is in the plane, the hinge assembly 30 drives the side edge 23 to move in the plane and gradually approach the containing chamber S.
也就是说,此时在保证侧棱23不凸伸出对应的外侧面13的基础上,使得侧棱23尽量靠近外侧面13,如此,既可以避免门体20在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉,又可以尽量保证箱体10的开度。That is to say, at this time, on the basis of ensuring that the side edge 23 does not protrude from the corresponding outer side surface 13, the side edge 23 is made as close to the outer side surface 13 as possible. In this way, the door body 20 can be prevented from contacting the surrounding cabinets during the opening process. Or interference is caused by the wall, etc., and the opening of the box 10 can be ensured as much as possible.
结合图18至图21,当门体20处于由第一中间开启角度α11继续开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一切换件401与第二切换件402相对静止,第一上自由段4131与第一下自由段4141重合形成第一自由段S1,第二上自由段4151与第二下自由段4161重合形成第二自由段S2,第二轴体312于第二段L2内运动而带动第一轴体311由停止位置A2朝向初始位置A1运动,门体20由容纳腔室S朝向枢转侧P移动而使得侧棱23保持在外侧面13靠近容纳腔室S的一侧。With reference to Figures 18 to 21, when the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the first intermediate opening angle α11 to the first opening angle α1, the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are relatively stationary, and the first upper opening is free. The section 4131 coincides with the first lower free section 4141 to form a first free section S1, the second upper free section 4151 and the second lower free section 4161 coincide to form a second free section S2, and the second shaft 312 moves in the second section L2 The first shaft body 311 is driven to move from the stop position A2 toward the initial position A1, and the door body 20 moves from the containing chamber S toward the pivoting side P so that the side edge 23 is kept on the side of the outer side surface 13 close to the containing chamber S.
这里,侧棱23于外侧面13所在平面内运动并逐渐靠近容纳腔室S。Here, the side edge 23 moves in the plane of the outer side surface 13 and gradually approaches the containing chamber S.
可以理解的,当门体20处于由第二中间开启角度α12继续开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,若门体20相对箱体10原地转动,侧棱23会逐渐朝靠近容纳腔室S的一侧移动,同时,门体20逐渐靠近容纳腔室S移动,门 体20会阻碍箱体10内的抽屉、搁物架等的开启,即会降低箱体10的开度。It is understandable that when the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the second intermediate opening angle α12 to the first opening angle α1, if the door body 20 rotates in situ relative to the box body 10, the side edge 23 will gradually move closer to the receiving cavity. One side of the chamber S moves, and at the same time, the door body 20 gradually moves closer to the containing chamber S. The door body 20 will hinder the opening of the drawers, shelves, etc. in the box body 10, that is, the opening degree of the box body 10 will be reduced.
而本实施方式的铰链组件30驱动侧棱24于外侧面13所在平面内运动,即可以使得门体20尽量远离箱体10,保证箱体10的开度,避免箱体10内的抽屉、搁物架等受门体20干涉而无法打开的问题,又可以避免侧棱23朝远离容纳腔室S的方向凸伸出外侧面13。The hinge assembly 30 of this embodiment drives the side edges 24 to move in the plane where the outer side surface 13 is located, that is, the door body 20 can be kept as far away from the box body 10 as possible to ensure the opening of the box body 10 and avoid drawers and shelves in the box body 10. The problem that the object shelf and the like cannot be opened due to the interference of the door body 20 can also avoid the side edge 23 protruding out of the outer surface 13 in a direction away from the containing chamber S.
需要说明的是,在门体20处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第四轴体322始终限位于限位段4222而使得切换组件40限位第二铰链件32。It should be noted that when the door 20 is opened from the closed state to the first opening angle α1, the fourth shaft 322 is always limited in the limiting section 4222 so that the switching assembly 40 limits the second hinge member 32.
另外,在此过程中,由于第一上自由段4131与第一下自由段4141始终重合成第一自由段S1,第二上自由段4151与第二下自由段4161始终重合成第二自由段S2,即第一切换件401与第二切换件402的运动轨迹完全相同,且第一轴体311于第一自由段S1运动,同时,第二轴体312于第二自由段S2运动,在该过程中第一切换件401与第二切换件402始终不会相互错开,即第一切换件401与第二切换件402保持相对静止,可避免第一上自由段4131与第一下自由段4141相互错位,同时避免第二上自由段4151与第二下自由段4161相互错位,如此,可确保第一轴体311于第一自由段S1顺畅运动,且第二轴体312于第二自由段S2顺畅运动。In addition, in this process, since the first upper free section 4131 and the first lower free section 4141 always overlap into the first free section S1, the second upper free section 4151 and the second lower free section 4161 always overlap into the second free section. S2, that is, the trajectories of the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are exactly the same, and the first shaft 311 moves in the first free section S1, and at the same time, the second shaft 312 moves in the second free section S2. During this process, the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 will never be staggered with each other, that is, the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 remain relatively stationary, which can avoid the first upper free section 4131 and the first lower free section 4141 are mutually misaligned, and at the same time, the second upper free section 4151 and the second lower free section 4161 are prevented from displacing each other. In this way, the smooth movement of the first shaft body 311 in the first free section S1 can be ensured, and the second shaft body 312 is free in the second free section. Section S2 moves smoothly.
结合图22至图25,当门体20处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第一切换件401及第二切换件402相对运动而使得第四轴体322脱离限位段4222,且第一轴体311和/或第二轴体312限位于锁止段4132、4142、4152、4162而使得切换组件40限位第一铰链件31。With reference to Figures 22 to 25, when the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle α1 to the second opening angle α2, the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 move relative to each other to make the fourth shaft body 322 is separated from the limiting section 4222, and the first shaft body 311 and/or the second shaft body 312 are limited in the locking section 4132, 4142, 4152, 4162, so that the switching assembly 40 limits the first hinge member 31.
这里,“第一切换件401及第二切换件402相对运动而使得第二铰链件32脱离切换组件40的限位,且第一轴体311和/或第二轴体312限位于锁止段4132、4142、4152、4162而使得切换组件40限位第一铰链件31”是指切换组件40与第二铰链件32之间相对运动而使得切换组件40与第二铰链件32之间不存在相互限位,切换组件40与第一铰链件31之间相对运动而使得切换组件40与第一铰链件31之间相互限位。Here, "the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402 move relative to each other so that the second hinge member 32 is disengaged from the limit of the switching assembly 40, and the first shaft body 311 and/or the second shaft body 312 are limited to the locking section 4132, 4142, 4152, 4162 and the switch assembly 40 to limit the first hinge member 31" refers to the relative movement between the switch assembly 40 and the second hinge member 32 so that there is no between the switch assembly 40 and the second hinge member 32 Restricting each other, the relative movement between the switching assembly 40 and the first hinge part 31 causes the switching assembly 40 and the first hinge part 31 to be restricted to each other.
在本实施方式中,第一轴体311同时限位于第一上锁止段4132及第一下锁止段4142,第二轴体312同时限位于第二上锁止段4152及第二下锁止段4162,且第四轴体322脱离第四限位段4222,说明如下:In this embodiment, the first shaft body 311 is confined to the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142 at the same time, and the second shaft body 312 is confined to the second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section at the same time. The stop section 4162, and the fourth shaft body 322 departs from the fourth limit section 4222, the description is as follows:
当门体20开启至第一开启角度α1时,第二轴体312由第二自由段S2运动至第二下锁止段4162并限位,此时第一轴体311及第二轴体312无法再相对第一自由段S1、第二自由段S2运动,且此时的第一轴体311邻近第一上锁止段4132及第一下锁止段4142,第二轴体312邻近第二上锁止段4152,第一上锁止段4132与第二上锁止段4152的轨迹适应第一轴体311及第二轴体312的运动路径。When the door body 20 is opened to the first opening angle α1, the second shaft 312 moves from the second free section S2 to the second lower locking section 4162 and is limited. At this time, the first shaft 311 and the second shaft 312 Can no longer move relative to the first free section S1 and the second free section S2, and at this time, the first shaft body 311 is adjacent to the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142, and the second shaft body 312 is adjacent to the second The trajectories of the upper locking section 4152, the first upper locking section 4132 and the second upper locking section 4152 are adapted to the movement paths of the first shaft body 311 and the second shaft body 312.
当门体20在第一开启角度α1的基础上继续开启时,门体20带动连接门体20的第二铰链件32运动,第二铰链件32通过第三自由段4211及第四限位段4222而施加作用力于第三轴体321及第四轴体322处,进而第三轴体321及第四轴体322驱动第一切换件401及第二切换件402运动。When the door body 20 continues to open on the basis of the first opening angle α1, the door body 20 drives the second hinge member 32 connected to the door body 20 to move, and the second hinge member 32 passes through the third free section 4211 and the fourth limit section At 4222, a force is applied to the third shaft 321 and the fourth shaft 322, and then the third shaft 321 and the fourth shaft 322 drive the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 to move.
具体的,此时第一轴体311邻近第一上锁止段4132,第二轴体312邻近第二上锁止段4152,第一切换件401可相对第一轴体311及第二轴体312运动第一角度,直至第一轴体311限位于第一上锁止段4132,且第二轴体312限位于第二上锁止段4152,同时,第二切换件402以第五轴体50为圆心而相对第一轴体311运动第二角度,直至第一轴体311限位于第二上锁止段4152内,在此过程中,第二轴体312与第二下锁止段4162始终接触,第二角度大于第一角度。Specifically, at this time, the first shaft body 311 is adjacent to the first upper locking section 4132, the second shaft body 312 is adjacent to the second upper locking section 4152, and the first switching member 401 can be opposed to the first shaft body 311 and the second shaft body. 312 moves by a first angle until the first shaft body 311 is confined to the first upper locking section 4132, and the second shaft body 312 is confined to the second upper locking section 4152, and at the same time, the second switching member 402 is positioned at the fifth shaft body 50 is the center of the circle and moves a second angle relative to the first shaft body 311 until the first shaft body 311 is confined within the second upper locking section 4152. In this process, the second shaft body 312 and the second lower locking section 4162 Always touch, the second angle is greater than the first angle.
也就是说,第一切换件401及第二切换件402均会转动一定角度,且第二切换件402的转动角度大于第一切换件401的转动角度,第一切换件401与第二切换件402之间也会产生相对运动而相互错开。That is to say, both the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 will rotate at a certain angle, and the rotation angle of the second switching element 402 is greater than the rotation angle of the first switching element 401, the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 401 Relative movement will also occur between 402 and they will be staggered with each other.
可以理解的是,第一切换件401及第二切换件402的转动过程没有一定的先后顺序,两者可以是同时转动的,比如说,第一切换件401与第二切换件402在某个转动角度范围内同步转动,而后第一切换件401与第二切换件402相互错开。It is understandable that the rotation process of the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 does not have a certain sequence, and the two can be rotated at the same time. For example, the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are in a certain sequence. Synchronously rotate within the range of the rotation angle, and then the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are staggered with each other.
实际操作中,第一切换件401及第二切换件402带动第一槽体411及第二槽体412分别相对第一轴体311及第二轴体312转动,第一轴体311脱离第一自由段S1并抵接至第一上锁止段4132及第一下锁止段4142,即第一轴体311同时限位于第一上锁止段4132及第一下锁止段4142,第二轴体312脱离第二自由段S2并抵接至第二上锁止段4152及第二下锁止段4162,即第二轴体312同时限位于第二上锁止段4152及第二下锁止段4162,同时,第二切换件402的运动使得第四轴体322脱离第四限位段4222。In actual operation, the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 drive the first groove body 411 and the second groove body 412 to rotate relative to the first shaft body 311 and the second shaft body 312, respectively, and the first shaft body 311 separates from the first shaft body 311 and the second shaft body 312. The free section S1 abuts the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142, that is, the first shaft body 311 is confined to the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142 at the same time, and the second The shaft 312 is separated from the second free section S2 and abuts against the second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section 4162, that is, the second shaft 312 is confined to the second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section at the same time. At the same time, the movement of the second switching member 402 causes the fourth shaft 322 to escape from the fourth limiting section 4222.
可以理解的,当第一轴体311位于第一上锁止段4132及第一下锁止段4142处时,由于第一切换件401与第二切换件402是相互错开的,原本相互重合的第一上自由段4131与第一下自由段4141也会相互错开,此时相互错开的第一上自由段4131与第一下自由段4141限制第一轴体311脱离第一上锁止段4132及第一下锁止段4142,即可保证在门体20继续开启的过程中第一轴体311始终保持在第一上锁止段4132及第一下锁止段4142处。It can be understood that when the first shaft body 311 is located at the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142, since the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are mutually staggered, they are originally overlapped with each other. The first upper free section 4131 and the first lower free section 4141 will also be staggered. At this time, the first upper free section 4131 and the first lower free section 4141 are mutually staggered to restrict the first shaft body 311 from being separated from the first upper locking section 4132. And the first lower locking section 4142 can ensure that the first shaft body 311 is always maintained at the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142 while the door body 20 continues to be opened.
同样的,当第二轴体312位于第二上锁止段4152及第二下锁止段4162处时,由于第一切换件401与第二切换 件402是相互错开的,原本相互重合的第二上自由段4151与第二下自由段4161也会相互错开,此时相互错开的第二上自由段4151与第二下自由段4161限制第二轴体312脱离第二上锁止段4152及第二下锁止段4162,即可保证在门体20继续开启的过程中第二轴体312始终保持在第二上锁止段4152及第二下锁止段4162处。Similarly, when the second shaft body 312 is located at the second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section 4162, since the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402 are staggered, the originally overlapping first The second upper free section 4151 and the second lower free section 4161 will also be staggered. At this time, the staggered second upper free section 4151 and the second lower free section 4161 restrict the second shaft 312 from separating from the second upper locking section 4152 and The second lower locking section 4162 can ensure that the second shaft 312 remains at the second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section 4162 while the door 20 continues to be opened.
另外,第二切换件402的转动角度大于第一切换件401的转动角度,即第二切换件402与第一切换件401之间相互错开,可进一步提高第一铰链件31与切换组件40之间的锁止效果,确保第一轴体311始终保持在第一上锁止段4132及第一下锁止段4142处,且第二轴体312始终保持在第二上锁止段4152及第二下锁止段4162处。In addition, the rotation angle of the second switching element 402 is greater than the rotation angle of the first switching element 401, that is, the second switching element 402 and the first switching element 401 are staggered with each other, which can further improve the relationship between the first hinge element 31 and the switching assembly 40. The locking effect ensures that the first shaft 311 is always maintained at the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142, and the second shaft 312 is always maintained at the second upper locking section 4152 and the first lower locking section 4142. The second locking section is at 4162.
同时,当第一切换件401及第二切换件402相对运动时,位于第一切换件401上的第三轴体321与位于第二切换件402上的第四轴体322之间的间距发生变化,而第三轴体321始终位于第三自由段4211,第四轴体322则由第四限位段4222移动至第四自由段4221,即第四轴体322脱离第四限位段4222。At the same time, when the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 move relatively, the distance between the third shaft 321 on the first switching element 401 and the fourth shaft 322 on the second switching element 402 occurs. The third shaft body 321 is always located in the third free section 4211, and the fourth shaft body 322 moves from the fourth limit section 4222 to the fourth free section 4221, that is, the fourth shaft body 322 departs from the fourth limit section 4222 .
需要说明的是,在本实施方式中,第一上锁止段4132为第一上自由段4131中靠近初始位置A1的部分,当门体20开启至第一开启角度α1时,第一轴体311由停止位置A2朝向初始位置A1运动而未到达初始位置A1,当门体20处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第一轴体311运动至初始位置A1(即运动至第一上锁止段4132),同时,第二轴体312运动至第一下锁止段4142,在此过程中,门体20实质继续由容纳腔室S朝向枢转侧P运动。It should be noted that in this embodiment, the first upper locking section 4132 is the part of the first upper free section 4131 close to the initial position A1. When the door body 20 is opened to the first opening angle α1, the first shaft body 311 moves from the stop position A2 to the initial position A1 without reaching the initial position A1. When the door 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle α1 to the second opening angle α2, the first shaft body 311 moves to the initial position A1 (that is, move to the first upper locking section 4132), and at the same time, the second shaft 312 moves to the first lower locking section 4142. In this process, the door body 20 substantially continues to move from the receiving chamber S to the pivoting side P movement.
结合图26至图29,当门体20处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第一切换件401与第二切换件402相对静止,第三轴体321于第三自由段421运动,第四轴体322于第四自由段4221运动。With reference to Figures 26 to 29, when the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle α2 to the maximum opening angle α3, the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are relatively stationary, and the third shaft 321 is at The third free section 421 moves, and the fourth shaft 322 moves on the fourth free section 4221.
这里,第一开启角度α1的范围大致为80°~83°,第二开启角度α2大约为90°,最大开启角度α3大于90°,也就是说,在门体20开启至80°~83°的过程中,门体20先沿第一方向X产生位移,避免门体20在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉,而后门体20再沿第二方向Y产生位移,避免门体20阻碍箱体10内的抽屉、搁物架等的开启,最后达到80°~83°,此后,门体20在继续打开至90°的过程中,切换组件40产生运动而使得门体20更换旋转轴继续转动,即在90°之后门体20以第三轴体321为旋转轴相对箱体10继续原地转动而进一步打开门体20。Here, the range of the first opening angle α1 is approximately 80°-83°, the second opening angle α2 is approximately 90°, and the maximum opening angle α3 is greater than 90°, that is, the door body 20 is opened to 80°-83° During the process, the door body 20 first displaces in the first direction X to prevent the door body 20 from interfering with the surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process, and the rear door body 20 displaces in the second direction Y to avoid the door body 20 The body 20 hinders the opening of the drawers, shelves, etc. in the box body 10, and finally reaches 80°~83°. After that, the switch assembly 40 moves while the door body 20 continues to open to 90°, so that the door body 20 is moved. The replacement of the rotating shaft continues to rotate, that is, after 90°, the door body 20 continues to rotate in situ relative to the box body 10 with the third shaft body 321 as the rotating shaft to further open the door body 20.
可以理解的是,角度不以上述说明为限。It can be understood that the angle is not limited to the above description.
可以看到,本实施方式通过切换组件40对第一铰链件31、第二铰链件32的解锁、锁止作用,可以有效控制第一铰链件31及第二铰链件32的顺序切换,使得门体20可稳定开启。It can be seen that this embodiment can effectively control the sequence switching of the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32 through the unlocking and locking effects of the switching assembly 40 on the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32, so that the door The body 20 can be stably opened.
可以理解的,当门体20处于闭合过程中时,即门体20由最大开启角度α3开始闭合时,切换组件40也可有效控制第一铰链件31及第二铰链件32的顺序切换,即当门体20处于由最大开启角度α3闭合至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第三轴体321于第三自由段4211运动,第四轴体322于第四自由段4221运动,且切换组件40锁止第一铰链件31,当门体20处于由第二开启角度α2闭合至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一切换件401及第二切换件402相对运动而使得第一铰链件31脱离切换组件40的限位,且第四轴体322限位于第四限位段4222,切换组件40锁止第二铰链件32,当门体20处于由第一开启角度α1闭合至完全闭合的过程中时,第一轴体311于第一自由段S1运动,第二轴体312于第二自由段S2运动。It can be understood that when the door body 20 is in the closing process, that is, when the door body 20 starts to close from the maximum opening angle α3, the switching assembly 40 can also effectively control the sequence switching of the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32, namely When the door body 20 is in the process of closing from the maximum opening angle α3 to the second opening angle α2, the third shaft body 321 moves in the third free section 4211, the fourth shaft body 322 moves in the fourth free section 4221, and switches The assembly 40 locks the first hinge member 31. When the door body 20 is in the process of closing from the second opening angle α2 to the first opening angle α1, the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402 move relative to each other so that the first The hinge member 31 is disengaged from the limit of the switching assembly 40, and the fourth shaft 322 is limited in the fourth limit section 4222. The switching assembly 40 locks the second hinge member 32. When the door 20 is closed from the first opening angle α1 to In the process of fully closing, the first shaft 311 moves in the first free section S1, and the second shaft 312 moves in the second free section S2.
换句话说,门体20的闭合过程与门体20的开启过程是顺序相反的过程,通过切换组件40对第一铰链件31、第二铰链件32的解锁、锁止作用,可以有效控制门体20开启、闭合过程中第一铰链件31、第二铰链件32的切换顺序。In other words, the closing process of the door body 20 and the opening process of the door body 20 are in the opposite sequence. The unlocking and locking effects of the switching assembly 40 on the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32 can effectively control the door. The switching sequence of the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32 during the opening and closing of the body 20.
在本实施方式中,第一轴体311的中心与侧棱23之间为第一间距,第一轴体311的中心与前壁21之间为第二间距,第一轴体311的中心与侧壁22之间为第三间距,第三轴体312的中心与侧棱23之间为第四间距,第三轴体312的中心与前壁21之间为第五间距,第三轴体312的中心与侧壁22之间为第六间距,当门体20处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一间距、第二间距及第三间距均先呈减小趋势后呈增大趋势,当门体20处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第四间距、第五间距及第六间距均保持不变。In this embodiment, the center of the first shaft body 311 and the side edges 23 are at a first distance, the center of the first shaft body 311 and the front wall 21 are at a second distance, and the center of the first shaft body 311 is The side walls 22 are at a third distance, the center of the third shaft 312 and the side edges 23 are at a fourth distance, the center of the third shaft 312 and the front wall 21 are at a fifth distance, and the third shaft is at a fifth distance. There is a sixth distance between the center of 312 and the side wall 22. When the door 20 is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle α1, the first distance, the second distance, and the third distance are all reduced first After the trend, it shows an increasing trend. When the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle α2 to the maximum opening angle α3, the fourth distance, the fifth distance, and the sixth distance remain unchanged.
另外,在本实施方式中,第一轴体311与第三轴体321相互错开,如此,可适用于嵌入式橱柜或容纳冰箱100的空间较小的场景。In addition, in this embodiment, the first shaft body 311 and the third shaft body 321 are staggered from each other, so that it can be applied to a scene where a built-in cabinet or a refrigerator 100 has a small space.
结合图30,以冰箱100嵌设于橱柜200中的简单示意图为例作说明。With reference to Fig. 30, a simple schematic diagram of the refrigerator 100 embedded in the cabinet 200 is taken as an example for description.
在本实施方式中,箱体10包括开口102及环绕开口102设置的前端面103,箱体10还包括容纳腔室S及邻近铰链组件30且在门体20转动路径延伸段上的外侧面13,门体20包括远离容纳腔室S的前壁21及始终夹设于前壁21及容纳腔室S之间的侧壁22,前壁21与侧壁22之间具有侧棱23。In this embodiment, the box body 10 includes an opening 102 and a front end surface 103 arranged around the opening 102. The box body 10 also includes a receiving chamber S and an outer side surface 13 adjacent to the hinge assembly 30 and on the extension of the rotation path of the door body 20. The door body 20 includes a front wall 21 away from the containing chamber S and a side wall 22 always sandwiched between the front wall 21 and the containing chamber S. A side edge 23 is provided between the front wall 21 and the side wall 22.
这里,当门体20处于关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,门体20以第一轴体311为轴转动,第一轴体311与前端面103之间具有第一距离,当门体20处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程 中时,门体20以第三轴体321为轴转动,第三轴体321与前端面103之间具有第二距离,第二距离大于第一距离,如此,可大大提高全嵌式冰箱100的最大开启角度。Here, when the door body 20 is in the closed state and is opened to the first opening angle α1, the door body 20 rotates about the first shaft body 311, and there is a first distance between the first shaft body 311 and the front end surface 103, When the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle α2 to the maximum opening angle α3, the door body 20 rotates around the third shaft body 321, and there is a second shaft between the third shaft body 321 and the front end surface 103. The second distance is greater than the first distance. In this way, the maximum opening angle of the fully built-in refrigerator 100 can be greatly increased.
另外,第一轴体311与外侧面13之间具有第三距离,当门体20处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第三轴体321与外侧面13之间具有第四距离,第四距离小于第三距离,可进一步提高箱体10的开度。In addition, there is a third distance between the first shaft body 311 and the outer side surface 13. When the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle α2 to the maximum opening angle α3, the third shaft body 321 and the outer side surface 13 There is a fourth distance between them, and the fourth distance is smaller than the third distance, which can further increase the opening degree of the box body 10.
具体说明如下:The specific instructions are as follows:
在冰箱100的某些运动轨迹中,可以看做是门体20依次以第一轴体311及第三轴体321为轴相对门体20运动。In some movement tracks of the refrigerator 100, it can be considered that the door body 20 moves relative to the door body 20 with the first shaft body 311 and the third shaft body 321 as axes in sequence.
在本实施方式中,铰链组件30还包括配合第一轴体311的第二轴体312及配合第三轴体321的第四轴体322,为了简化说明,简单看做门体20先是以第一轴体311为轴进行转动,而后通过切换组件40切换至以第三轴体321为轴进行转动。In this embodiment, the hinge assembly 30 further includes a second shaft body 312 matching the first shaft body 311 and a fourth shaft body 322 matching the third shaft body 321. To simplify the description, simply regard the door body 20 as the first The one shaft body 311 is used as the axis to rotate, and then the switching assembly 40 is switched to use the third shaft body 321 as the axis to rotate.
实际操作中,为了提高嵌入效果,较佳是使得冰箱100完全嵌入至橱柜200中,冰箱100为自由嵌入式冰箱,即橱柜200的前端201与门体20远离箱体10的一侧前壁21位于同一平面,或者是门体20的前壁21完全不凸伸出橱柜200的前端201。In actual operation, in order to improve the embedding effect, it is better to completely embed the refrigerator 100 into the cabinet 200. The refrigerator 100 is a freely embedded refrigerator, that is, the front end 201 of the cabinet 200 and the front wall 21 of the door 20 away from the cabinet 10 It is located on the same plane, or the front wall 21 of the door body 20 does not protrude from the front end 201 of the cabinet 200 at all.
现有技术中,冰箱均为单轴冰箱,且冰箱的旋转轴与冰箱侧壁及前壁之间需要保持一定的距离,如此,才能有足够的空间来满足发泡或其他工艺,即现有的冰箱的旋转轴位置大致位于图30中的第一轴体311位置,在这种情况下,将单轴冰箱嵌入至橱柜200之后,由于橱柜200夹设于前端201与内壁202之间的棱角203与门体20侧棱23对应设置,当门体20开启时,侧棱23会与门体20干涉而限制门体20的最大开启角度,而为了保证门体20的正常开启,现有技术的通常做法是增大橱柜200内壁202与冰箱100之间的间隙,该间隙大致需要为10cm左右,而这将严重影响嵌入效果,且不利于有限空间的合理利用。In the prior art, all refrigerators are single-axis refrigerators, and a certain distance must be maintained between the rotation axis of the refrigerator and the side wall and front wall of the refrigerator. In this way, there can be enough space to satisfy foaming or other processes. The position of the rotation axis of the refrigerator is roughly at the position of the first shaft 311 in FIG. 30. In this case, after the single-axis refrigerator is embedded in the cabinet 200, the cabinet 200 is sandwiched between the front end 201 and the inner wall 202. 203 is arranged corresponding to the side edge 23 of the door body 20. When the door body 20 is opened, the side edge 23 will interfere with the door body 20 to limit the maximum opening angle of the door body 20. In order to ensure the normal opening of the door body 20, the prior art The usual method is to increase the gap between the inner wall 202 of the cabinet 200 and the refrigerator 100. The gap roughly needs to be about 10 cm, which will seriously affect the embedding effect and is not conducive to the rational use of the limited space.
结合图30,阴影区域表示处于关闭状态的门体20,当门体20处于开启过程中时,若门体20始终以第一轴体311为轴转动(即现有技术),参考图30中的虚线门体20’,由于第一轴体311靠近前端面103,即此时第一轴体311远离橱柜200的前端201,当门体20’开启至一定角度后,橱柜200的棱角203会与门体20’相互干涉而限制门体20’的最大开启角度。With reference to Figure 30, the shaded area represents the door 20 in the closed state. When the door 20 is in the opening process, if the door 20 always rotates around the first shaft 311 (ie, prior art), refer to Figure 30 Dotted line door 20', because the first shaft 311 is close to the front end 103, that is, the first shaft 311 is away from the front end 201 of the cabinet 200 at this time. When the door 20' is opened to a certain angle, the corners 203 of the cabinet 200 will change It interferes with the door body 20' to limit the maximum opening angle of the door body 20'.
而在本实施方式中,第三轴体321位于第一切换件401上,在门体20开启过程中,切换组件40相对第一铰链件31、第二铰链件32运动而使得第三轴体321逐渐远离前端面103,即第三轴体321逐渐朝靠近橱柜200的前端201的方向移动,亦即,此时整个门体20朝远离箱体10的方向运动,参考图30中的实线门体20,橱柜200棱角203对门体20的干涉作用大大减小,门体20开启至较大的角度才会有橱柜200棱角203相互干涉,从而大大提高了门体20的最大开启角度。In this embodiment, the third shaft body 321 is located on the first switching member 401. During the opening of the door body 20, the switching assembly 40 moves relative to the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32 to make the third shaft body 321 gradually moves away from the front end surface 103, that is, the third shaft body 321 gradually moves toward the front end 201 of the cabinet 200, that is, at this time, the entire door body 20 moves away from the box body 10, refer to the solid line in FIG. 30 The interference effect of the door 20 and the corners 203 of the cabinet 200 on the door 20 is greatly reduced, and the corners 203 of the cabinet 200 will interfere with each other when the door 20 is opened to a larger angle, thereby greatly increasing the maximum opening angle of the door 20.
也就是说,本实施方式通过切换组件40的作用可使得后期门体20以第三轴体321为轴转动,在保证冰箱100自由嵌入橱柜200的前提下,可有效提高门体20的最大开启角度,进而便于用户操作冰箱100,可大大提高用户体验。That is to say, in this embodiment, the switch assembly 40 can make the late door 20 rotate around the third shaft 321 as the axis, and the maximum opening of the door 20 can be effectively increased on the premise that the refrigerator 100 is freely inserted into the cabinet 200. The angle, thereby facilitating the user to operate the refrigerator 100, can greatly improve the user experience.
而且,本实施方式无需增大橱柜200内壁202与冰箱100之间的间隙,可以做到冰箱100与橱柜200的无缝连接,大大提高了嵌入效果。Moreover, in this embodiment, there is no need to increase the gap between the inner wall 202 of the cabinet 200 and the refrigerator 100, and a seamless connection between the refrigerator 100 and the cabinet 200 can be achieved, which greatly improves the embedding effect.
另外,本实施方式的切换组件40在带动第三轴体321逐渐朝靠近橱柜200的前端201的方向移动的同时,也带动第三轴体321逐渐靠近橱柜200的内壁202,也就是说,当门体20以第三轴体321为轴进行转动时,此时的第三轴体321相较于第一轴体311更加靠近橱柜200的前端201及内壁202,如此,即可以提高门体20的最大开启角度,又可使得门体20远离箱体10以增加箱体10的开度,便于箱体10内搁物架、抽屉等的开闭,或者说,可便于物品的取放。In addition, while the switching assembly 40 of this embodiment drives the third shaft 321 to gradually move toward the front end 201 of the cabinet 200, it also drives the third shaft 321 to gradually approach the inner wall 202 of the cabinet 200, that is, when When the door body 20 rotates with the third shaft body 321 as the axis, the third shaft body 321 is closer to the front end 201 and the inner wall 202 of the cabinet 200 than the first shaft body 311 at this time. In this way, the door body 20 can be improved. The maximum opening angle can make the door 20 far away from the box body 10 to increase the opening degree of the box body 10, which facilitates the opening and closing of shelves, drawers, etc. in the box body 10, or in other words, facilitates the picking and placing of items.
当然,最终作为旋转轴的第三轴体321也可位于其他位置,例如,当门体20以第三轴体321为轴进行转动时,此时的第三轴体321相较于第一轴体311靠近橱柜200的前端201,且第三轴体321相较于第一轴体311远离橱柜200的内壁202等等。Of course, the third shaft body 321 ultimately serving as the rotating shaft can also be located in other positions. For example, when the door body 20 rotates around the third shaft body 321, the third shaft body 321 at this time is compared with the first shaft. The body 311 is close to the front end 201 of the cabinet 200, and the third shaft 321 is farther away from the inner wall 202 of the cabinet 200 than the first shaft 311.
可以理解的是,切换组件40控制门体20开启、闭合过程中第一铰链件31、第二铰链件32的切换顺序,可有效避免门体20在开闭过程中与橱柜200相互干扰。It can be understood that the switching assembly 40 controls the switching sequence of the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32 during the opening and closing of the door body 20, which can effectively prevent the door body 20 from interfering with the cabinet 200 during the opening and closing process.
另外,需要说明的是,通过具体的轴体槽体设计可有效控制门体20的运动轨迹,在本实施方式中,箱体10包括连接铰链组件30的枢转侧P,当门体20处于开启过程中时,铰链组件30至少驱动门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动,从而避免门体20在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉,轴体槽体的具体设计可参考下面的实施方式。In addition, it should be noted that the specific shaft groove design can effectively control the movement trajectory of the door 20. In this embodiment, the box 10 includes the pivot side P connected to the hinge assembly 30. When the door 20 is in the During the opening process, the hinge assembly 30 at least drives the door body 20 to move from the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S, so as to prevent the door body 20 from interfering with the surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process. The specific design can refer to the following implementation.
在本实施方式中,位于门体20不同区域的铰链组件30结构会有区别,上述铰链组件30为位于门体20上方与 箱体10之间的铰链组件30,下面,结合图31及图32,简单介绍位于门体20下方与箱体10之间的铰链组件30’。In this embodiment, the structure of the hinge assembly 30 located in different areas of the door body 20 will be different. The above-mentioned hinge assembly 30 is the hinge assembly 30 located between the upper part of the door body 20 and the box body 10. Below, in conjunction with FIGS. 31 and 32 , A brief introduction to the hinge assembly 30' located below the door body 20 and the box body 10.
下方的铰链组件30’与上方的铰链组件30的区别在于:下方铰链组件30’的第一铰链件31’上具有凸部313’,第二铰链件32’上具有对应的卡勾323’,卡勾323’为弹性件,当门体20处于闭合状态时,凸部313’作用卡勾323’发生形变而使得门体20与箱体10紧密配合,当门体20处于开启过程中时,门体20带动卡勾323’运动,卡勾323’发生形变而脱离凸部313’。The difference between the lower hinge assembly 30' and the upper hinge assembly 30 is that the first hinge part 31' of the lower hinge assembly 30' has a convex portion 313', and the second hinge part 32' has a corresponding hook 323', The hook 323' is an elastic member. When the door body 20 is in the closed state, the convex portion 313' acts on the hook 323' to deform to make the door body 20 and the box body 10 closely fit. When the door body 20 is in the opening process, The door body 20 drives the hook 323' to move, and the hook 323' is deformed and detaches from the convex portion 313'.
也就是说,当门体20处于闭合状态时,凸部313’与卡勾323’之间为过盈配合,增强了门体20的闭合效果。In other words, when the door body 20 is in the closed state, there is an interference fit between the convex portion 313' and the hook 323', which enhances the closing effect of the door body 20.
需要注意的是,由于第一铰链件31’与第二铰链件32’之间连接有切换组件40’,第二铰链件32’还包括沿厚度方向途径切换组件40’的延伸段324’,延伸段324’连接卡勾323’,如此,可使得卡勾323’呈水平设置且可与凸部313’相互适配。It should be noted that, since the switching assembly 40' is connected between the first hinge part 31' and the second hinge part 32', the second hinge part 32' also includes an extension 324' that passes through the switching assembly 40' in the thickness direction, The extension section 324' is connected to the hook 323', so that the hook 323' is arranged horizontally and can be matched with the convex portion 313'.
下面,以第二种组合方式作为第二实施方式具体说明本发明的铰链组件30a,为了便于说明,相同或类似的部件采用相同或类似的编号。Hereinafter, the hinge assembly 30a of the present invention will be specifically described using the second combination mode as the second embodiment. For ease of description, the same or similar components are given the same or similar numbers.
结合图33至图36,铰链组件30a包括固定于箱体10a的第一铰链件31a、固定于门体20a的第二铰链件32a以及连接第一铰链件31a及第二铰链件32a的切换组件40a。33 to 36, the hinge assembly 30a includes a first hinge part 31a fixed to the box body 10a, a second hinge part 32a fixed to the door body 20a, and a switching assembly connecting the first hinge part 31a and the second hinge part 32a 40a.
第一铰链件31a与切换组件40a之间通过相互配合的第一轴体组311a、312a及第一槽体组411a、412a实现相对运动,第一轴体组311a、312a包括第一轴体311a及第二轴体312a,第一槽体组411a、412a包括第一自由段S1、第二自由段S2及锁止段4132a、4142a、4152a、4162a,第一自由段S1包括相对设置的初始位置A1及停止位置A2。The first hinge part 31a and the switching assembly 40a realize relative movement through the first shaft group 311a, 312a and the first groove body group 411a, 412a that cooperate with each other. The first shaft group 311a, 312a includes the first shaft body 311a. And the second shaft 312a. The first slot group 411a, 412a includes a first free section S1, a second free section S2, and a locking section 4132a, 4142a, 4152a, 4162a. The first free section S1 includes an initial position that is relatively set A1 and stop position A2.
第二铰链件32a与切换组件40a之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组321a、322a及第二槽体组421a、422a实现相对运动,第二轴体组321a、322a包括第三轴体321a及第四轴体322a,第二槽体组421a、422a包括第三自由段421a、第四自由段4221a及限位段4222a,第三自由段421a包括相对设置的起始位置B1及枢转位置B2,第四自由段4221a包括相连的移动段M1及转动段M2。The second hinge member 32a and the switching assembly 40a realize relative movement through the mutually matched second shaft body groups 321a, 322a and the second groove body groups 421a, 422a. The second shaft body groups 321a, 322a include the third shaft body 321a. And the fourth shaft 322a, the second slot group 421a, 422a includes a third free section 421a, a fourth free section 4221a and a limiting section 4222a, and the third free section 421a includes a relatively set starting position B1 and a pivoting position B2, the fourth free section 4221a includes a connected moving section M1 and a rotating section M2.
在本实施方式中,第一铰链件31a包括第一轴体311a及第二轴体322a,切换组件40a包括具有第一自由段S1的第一槽体411a、具有第二自由段S2的第二槽体412a、第三轴体321a及第四轴体322a,第二铰链件32a包括具有第三自由段421a的第三槽体421a及具有第四自由段4221a的第四槽体422a。In this embodiment, the first hinge member 31a includes a first shaft body 311a and a second shaft body 322a, and the switching assembly 40a includes a first groove body 411a having a first free section S1, and a second free section S2. The groove body 412a, the third shaft body 321a and the fourth shaft body 322a. The second hinge member 32a includes a third groove body 421a with a third free section 421a and a fourth groove body 422a with a fourth free section 4221a.
切换组件40a包括相互配合的第一切换件401a及第二切换件402a。The switching assembly 40a includes a first switching element 401a and a second switching element 402a that cooperate with each other.
第一槽体411a包括位于第一切换件401a的第一上槽体413a及位于第二切换件402a的第一下槽体414a,第一自由段S1包括位于第一上槽体413a的第一上自由段4131a及位于第一下槽体414a的第一下自由段4141a。The first slot body 411a includes a first upper slot body 413a located in the first switching member 401a and a first lower slot body 414a located in the second switching member 402a, and the first free section S1 includes a first upper slot body 413a located in the first upper slot body 413a. The upper free section 4131a and the first lower free section 4141a located in the first lower tank 414a.
第二槽体412a包括位于第一切换件401a的第二上槽体415a及位于第二切换件402a的第二下槽体416a,第二自由段S2包括位于第二上槽体415a的第二上自由段4151a及位于第二下槽体416a的第二下自由段4161a。The second tank 412a includes a second upper tank 415a located in the first switching member 401a and a second lower tank 416a located in the second switching member 402a, and the second free section S2 includes a second upper tank 415a located in the second upper tank 415a. The upper free section 4151a and the second lower free section 4161a located in the second lower tank 416a.
锁止段4132a、4142a、4152a、4162a包括连通第一上自由段4131a的第一上锁止段4132a、连通第一下自由段4141a的第一下锁止段4142a、连通第二上自由段4151a的第二上锁止段4152a及连通第二下自由段4161a的第二下锁止段4162a。The locking sections 4132a, 4142a, 4152a, 4162a include a first upper locking section 4132a communicating with the first upper free section 4131a, a first lower locking section 4142a communicating with the first lower free section 4141a, and a second upper free section 4151a communicating The second upper locking section 4152a and the second lower locking section 4162a communicating with the second lower free section 4161a.
第一上锁止段4132a与第一下锁止段4142a始终相互错开,第二上锁止段4152a与第二下锁止段4162a始终相互错开。The first upper locking section 4132a and the first lower locking section 4142a are always staggered from each other, and the second upper locking section 4152a and the second lower locking section 4162a are always staggered from each other.
这里,“始终相互错开”是指在门体20a开启过程中,第一上锁止段4132a与第一下锁止段4142a不会出现完全重合的状态,第二上锁止段4152a与第二下锁止段4162a也不会出现完全重合的状态。Here, "always staggered with each other" means that during the opening process of the door 20a, the first upper locking section 4132a and the first lower locking section 4142a will not completely overlap, and the second upper locking section 4152a and the second locking section 4142a will not completely overlap each other. The lower locking section 4162a will not completely overlap.
在本实施方式中,第一切换件401a相较于第二切换件402a靠近第一铰链件31a,即第一铰链件31a、第一切换件401a、第二切换件402a及第二铰链件32a之间依次叠置。In this embodiment, the first switching element 401a is closer to the first hinge element 31a than the second switching element 402a, that is, the first hinge element 31a, the first switching element 401a, the second switching element 402a, and the second hinge element 32a Stacked in turn.
结合图36,铰链组件30a还包括第一铆接片4111a、第二铆接片4121a、第五轴体50a(包括铆接柱51a及铆接柱垫片52a)、第一贯穿孔4014a、第二贯穿孔4024a、通孔4026a,第一切换件401a包括依次叠置的第一衬片4011a、第一滑片4012a及第一衬套4013a,第二切换片402a包括依次叠置的第二衬片4021a、第二滑片4022a及第二衬套4023a,第一切换件401a还包括包覆第一衬片4011a、第一滑片4012a及第一衬套4013a周缘的第一装饰片4015a,第二切换件402a还包括包覆第二衬片4021a、第二滑片4022a及第二衬套4023a周缘的第二装饰片4025a,铰链组件30a的该些部件的具体说明可以参考第一实施方式的说明,在此不再赘述。36, the hinge assembly 30a further includes a first riveting piece 4111a, a second riveting piece 4121a, a fifth shaft body 50a (including a riveting post 51a and a riveting post gasket 52a), a first through hole 4014a, and a second through hole 4024a , Through hole 4026a, the first switching member 401a includes a first lining 4011a, a first sliding plate 4012a, and a first bushing 4013a that are sequentially stacked, and the second switching member 402a includes a second lining 4021a, a first Two sliding pieces 4022a and a second bushing 4023a. The first switching member 401a also includes a first decorative piece 4015a covering the peripheries of the first sliding piece 4011a, the first sliding piece 4012a and the first bushing 4013a, and the second switching piece 402a It also includes a second decorative sheet 4025a covering the periphery of the second lining 4021a, the second sliding sheet 4022a, and the second bushing 4023a. The specific description of these components of the hinge assembly 30a can refer to the description of the first embodiment. No longer.
下面,介绍铰链组件30a的具体工作流程。Next, the specific working process of the hinge assembly 30a is introduced.
在本实施方式中,箱体10a包括邻近铰链组件30a且在门体20a转动路径延伸段上的外侧面13a,门体20a包括远离容纳腔室S的前壁21a及始终夹设于前壁21a及容纳腔室S之间的侧壁22a,前壁21a与侧壁22a之间具有侧棱23a。In this embodiment, the box body 10a includes an outer side surface 13a adjacent to the hinge assembly 30a and on the extension section of the rotation path of the door body 20a. The door body 20a includes a front wall 21a away from the containing chamber S and always sandwiched on the front wall 21a. The side wall 22a between the accommodating chamber S and the front wall 21a has a side edge 23a between the front wall 21a and the side wall 22a.
结合图37至图40,当门体20a处于关闭状态时,第一切换件401a与第二切换件402a相对静止,第一上自由段4131a与第一下自由段4141a重合形成第一自由段S1,第二上自由段4151a与第二下自由段4161a重合形成第二自由段S2,第一轴体311a位于初始位置A1,第二轴体312a位于第二自由段S2的一端。37 to 40, when the door 20a is in the closed state, the first switching member 401a and the second switching member 402a are relatively stationary, and the first upper free section 4131a and the first lower free section 4141a overlap to form a first free section S1 , The second upper free section 4151a and the second lower free section 4161a overlap to form a second free section S2, the first shaft body 311a is located at the initial position A1, and the second shaft body 312a is located at one end of the second free section S2.
具体的,外侧面13a与侧壁22a位于同一平面,可以保证外观上的流畅性,提高美观度,且也便于门体20a的安装,但不以此为限。Specifically, the outer side surface 13a and the side wall 22a are located on the same plane, which can ensure the smoothness of the appearance, improve the aesthetics, and also facilitate the installation of the door body 20a, but it is not limited to this.
结合图41至图44,当门体20a处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一切换件401a与第二切换件402a相对静止,第一上自由段4131a与第一下自由段4141a重合形成第一自由段S1,第二上自由段4151a与第二下自由段4161a重合形成第二自由段S2,第二轴体312a于第二自由段S2内运动而带动第一轴体311a由初始位置A1运动至停止位置A2,门体20a由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动。41 to 44, when the door body 20a is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle α1, the first switching member 401a and the second switching member 402a are relatively stationary, and the first upper free section 4131a and the first The lower free section 4141a overlaps to form a first free section S1. The second upper free section 4151a and the second lower free section 4161a overlap to form a second free section S2. The second shaft 312a moves in the second free section S2 to drive the first free section S2. The shaft body 311a moves from the initial position A1 to the stop position A2, and the door body 20a moves from the pivoting side P toward the accommodation chamber S.
这里,侧棱23a运动至位于外侧面13a靠近容纳腔室S的一侧,也就是说,此时铰链组件30a驱动侧棱23a朝靠近容纳腔室S的一侧移动,在门体20a打开过程中,可以避免因侧棱23a凸伸出外侧面13a而与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉。Here, the side edge 23a moves to the side of the outer side 13a close to the accommodating chamber S, that is, at this time, the hinge assembly 30a drives the side edge 23a to move toward the side close to the accommodating chamber S, and the door body 20a is opened during the opening process. In this way, it is possible to avoid interference with surrounding cabinets or walls due to the side ribs 23a protruding from the outer surface 13a.
这里,为了尽量保证箱体10a的开度,避免箱体10a内的抽屉、搁物架等受门体20a干涉而无法打开的问题,侧棱23a朝靠近容纳腔室S的一侧移动至外侧面13a所在的平面内之后,铰链组件30a驱动侧棱23a于该平面内运动并逐渐靠近容纳腔室S。Here, in order to ensure the opening of the box 10a as much as possible and avoid the problem that drawers, shelves, etc. in the box 10a cannot be opened due to the interference of the door 20a, the side ribs 23a move to the side close to the accommodating chamber S to the outside. After the side surface 13a is in the plane, the hinge assembly 30a drives the side edge 23a to move in the plane and gradually approach the containing chamber S.
也就是说,此时在保证侧棱23a不凸伸出对应的外侧面13a的基础上,使得侧棱23a尽量靠近外侧面13a,如此,既可以避免门体20a在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉,又可以尽量保证箱体10a的开度。That is to say, at this time, on the basis of ensuring that the side rib 23a does not protrude from the corresponding outer side 13a, the side rib 23a is made as close to the outer side 13a as possible. In this way, it is possible to prevent the door body 20a from contacting the surrounding cabinets during the opening process. Or the wall may interfere, and the opening of the box 10a can be ensured as much as possible.
需要说明的是,在门体20a处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第四轴体322a始终限位于限位段4222a而使得切换组件40a限位第二铰链件32a。It should be noted that when the door body 20a is opened from the closed state to the first opening angle α1, the fourth shaft body 322a is always limited at the limiting section 4222a so that the switching assembly 40a limits the second hinge member 32a.
另外,在此过程中,由于第一上自由段4131a与第一下自由段4141a始终重合成第一自由段S1,第二上自由段4151a与第二下自由段4161a始终重合成第二自由段S2,即第一切换件401a与第二切换件402a的运动轨迹完全相同,且第一轴体311a于第一自由段S1运动,同时,第二轴体312a于第二自由段S2运动,在该过程中第一切换件401a与第二切换件402a始终不会相互错开,即第一切换件401a与第二切换件402a保持相对静止,可避免第一上自由段4131a与第一下自由段4141a相互错位,同时避免第二上自由段4151a与第二下自由段4161a相互错位,如此,可确保第一轴体311a于第一自由段S1顺畅运动,且第二轴体312a于第二自由段S2顺畅运动。In addition, in this process, since the first upper free section 4131a and the first lower free section 4141a always overlap into the first free section S1, the second upper free section 4151a and the second lower free section 4161a always overlap into the second free section. S2, that is, the trajectories of the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a are exactly the same, and the first shaft 311a moves in the first free section S1, and at the same time, the second shaft 312a moves in the second free section S2. During this process, the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a will not be staggered with each other, that is, the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a remain relatively static, which can avoid the first upper free section 4131a and the first lower free section 4141a is misaligned with each other, and at the same time, the second upper free section 4151a and the second lower free section 4161a are prevented from misaligning each other. In this way, it can be ensured that the first shaft body 311a moves smoothly in the first free section S1, and the second shaft body 312a is free in the second free section. Section S2 moves smoothly.
结合图45至图48,当门体20a处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第一切换件401a及第二切换件402a相对运动而使得第四轴体322a脱离限位段4222a,且第一轴体311a和/或第二轴体312a限位于锁止段4132a、4142a、4152a、4162a而使得切换组件40a限位第一铰链件31a。With reference to FIGS. 45 to 48, when the door body 20a is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle α1 to the second opening angle α2, the first switching member 401a and the second switching member 402a move relative to each other to make the fourth shaft body 322a is separated from the limiting section 4222a, and the first shaft body 311a and/or the second shaft body 312a is limited to the locking sections 4132a, 4142a, 4152a, 4162a, so that the switching assembly 40a limits the first hinge member 31a.
这里,“第一切换件401a及第二切换件402a相对运动而使得第二铰链件32a脱离切换组件40a的限位,且第一轴体311a和/或第二轴体312a限位于锁止段4132a、4142a、4152a、4162a而使得切换组件40a限位第一铰链件31a”是指切换组件40a与第二铰链件32a之间相对运动而使得切换组件40a与第二铰链件32a之间不存在相互限位,切换组件40a与第一铰链件31a之间相对运动而使得切换组件40a与第一铰链件31a之间相互限位。Here, "the relative movement of the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a causes the second hinge element 32a to escape the limit of the switching assembly 40a, and the first shaft body 311a and/or the second shaft body 312a are limited to the locking section 4132a, 4142a, 4152a, 4162a so that the switch assembly 40a limits the first hinge part 31a" refers to the relative movement between the switch assembly 40a and the second hinge part 32a so that there is no between the switch assembly 40a and the second hinge part 32a. To limit each other, the relative movement between the switching assembly 40a and the first hinge part 31a causes the switching assembly 40a and the first hinge part 31a to limit each other.
在本实施方式中,第一轴体311a同时限位于第一上锁止段4132a及第一下锁止段4142a,第二轴体312a同时限位于第二上锁止段4152a及第二下锁止段4162a,且第四轴体322a脱离第四限位段4222a,说明如下:In this embodiment, the first shaft body 311a is confined to the first upper locking section 4132a and the first lower locking section 4142a at the same time, and the second shaft body 312a is confined to the second upper locking section 4152a and the second lower locking section at the same time. The stop section 4162a, and the fourth shaft body 322a is separated from the fourth limit section 4222a, the description is as follows:
当门体20a开启至第一开启角度α1时,第二轴体312a由第二自由段S2运动至第二下锁止段4162a并限位,此时第一轴体311a及第二轴体312a无法再相对第一自由段S1、第二自由段S2运动,且此时的第一轴体311a邻近第一上锁止段4132a及第一下锁止段4142a,第二轴体312a邻近第二上锁止段4152a,第一上锁止段4132a与第二上锁止段4152a的轨迹适应第一轴体311a及第二轴体312a的运动路径。When the door body 20a is opened to the first opening angle α1, the second shaft body 312a moves from the second free section S2 to the second lower locking section 4162a and is restricted. At this time, the first shaft body 311a and the second shaft body 312a Can no longer move relative to the first free section S1 and the second free section S2, and at this time, the first shaft body 311a is adjacent to the first upper locking section 4132a and the first lower locking section 4142a, and the second shaft body 312a is adjacent to the second The trajectories of the upper locking section 4152a, the first upper locking section 4132a and the second upper locking section 4152a are adapted to the movement paths of the first shaft body 311a and the second shaft body 312a.
当门体20a在第一开启角度α1的基础上继续开启时,门体20a带动连接门体20a的第二铰链件32a运动,第二铰链件32a通过第三自由段4211a及第四限位段4222a而施加作用力于第三轴体321a及第四轴体322a处,进而第三轴体321a及第四轴体322a驱动第一切换件401a及第二切换件402a运动。When the door body 20a continues to open on the basis of the first opening angle α1, the door body 20a drives the second hinge member 32a connected to the door body 20a to move, and the second hinge member 32a passes through the third free section 4211a and the fourth limit section 4222a applies force to the third shaft 321a and the fourth shaft 322a, and then the third shaft 321a and the fourth shaft 322a drive the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a to move.
具体的,此时第一轴体311a邻近第一上锁止段4132a,第二轴体312a邻近第二上锁止段4152a,第一切换件401a可相对第一轴体311a及第二轴体312a运动第一角度,直至第一轴体311a限位于第一上锁止段4132a,且第二轴体312a限位于第二上锁止段4152a,同时,第二切换件402a以第五轴体50a为圆心而相对第一轴体311a运动第二角度,直至第一轴体311a限位于第二锁止段4152a内,在此过程中,第二轴体312a与第二下锁止段4162a始终接触,第二角度大于第一角度。Specifically, at this time, the first shaft body 311a is adjacent to the first upper locking section 4132a, the second shaft body 312a is adjacent to the second upper locking section 4152a, and the first switching member 401a can be opposed to the first shaft body 311a and the second shaft body. 312a moves at a first angle until the first shaft body 311a is confined to the first upper locking section 4132a, and the second shaft body 312a is confined to the second upper locking section 4152a, and at the same time, the second switching member 402a uses the fifth shaft body 50a is the center of the circle and moves a second angle relative to the first shaft 311a until the first shaft 311a is confined within the second locking section 4152a. During this process, the second shaft 312a and the second lower locking section 4162a are always Contact, the second angle is greater than the first angle.
也就是说,第一切换件401a及第二切换件402a均会转动一定角度,且第二切换件402a的转动角度大于第一切换件401a的转动角度,第一切换件401a与第二切换件402a之间也会产生相对运动而相互错开。That is, both the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a will rotate at a certain angle, and the rotation angle of the second switching element 402a is greater than the rotation angle of the first switching element 401a, the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 401a 402a will also move relative to each other and stagger each other.
可以理解的是,第一切换件401a及第二切换件402a的转动过程没有一定的先后顺序,两者可以是同时转动的,比如说,第一切换件401a与第二切换件402a在某个转动角度范围内同步转动,而后第一切换件401a与第二切换件402a相互错开。It is understandable that the rotation process of the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a does not have a certain sequence, and the two can be rotated at the same time. For example, the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a are in a certain Synchronously rotate within the range of the rotation angle, and then the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a are staggered from each other.
实际操作中,第一切换件401a及第二切换件402a带动第一槽体411a及第二槽体412a分别相对第一轴体311a及第二轴体312a转动,第一轴体311a脱离第一自由段S1并抵接至第一上锁止段4132a及第一下锁止段4142a,即第一轴体311a同时限位于第一上锁止段4132a及第一下锁止段4142a,第二轴体312a脱离第二自由段S2并抵接至第二上锁止段4152a及第二下锁止段4162a,即第二轴体312a同时限位于第二上锁止段4152a及第二下锁止段4162a,同时,第二切换件402a的运动使得第四轴体322a脱离第四限位段4222a。In actual operation, the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a drive the first groove body 411a and the second groove body 412a to rotate relative to the first shaft body 311a and the second shaft body 312a, respectively, and the first shaft body 311a separates from the first shaft body 311a. The free section S1 is in contact with the first upper locking section 4132a and the first lower locking section 4142a, that is, the first shaft body 311a is confined to the first upper locking section 4132a and the first lower locking section 4142a at the same time, and the second The shaft 312a is separated from the second free section S2 and abuts on the second upper locking section 4152a and the second lower locking section 4162a, that is, the second shaft 312a is confined to the second upper locking section 4152a and the second lower locking section at the same time. At the same time, the movement of the second switching member 402a causes the fourth shaft 322a to escape from the fourth limiting section 4222a.
可以理解的,当第一轴体311a位于第一上锁止段4132a及第一下锁止段4142a处时,由于第一切换件401a与第二切换件402a是相互错开的,原本相互重合的第一上自由段4131a与第一下自由段4141a也会相互错开,此时相互错开的第一上自由段4131a与第一下自由段4141a限制第一轴体311a脱离第一上锁止段4132a及第一下锁止段4142a,即可保证在门体20a继续开启的过程中第一轴体311a始终保持在第一上锁止段4132a及第一下锁止段4142a处。It can be understood that when the first shaft body 311a is located at the first upper locking section 4132a and the first lower locking section 4142a, the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a are mutually staggered, and originally overlapped with each other. The first upper free section 4131a and the first lower free section 4141a will also be staggered. At this time, the first upper free section 4131a and the first lower free section 4141a are mutually staggered to restrict the first shaft body 311a from leaving the first upper locking section 4132a. And the first lower locking section 4142a can ensure that the first shaft body 311a is always maintained at the first upper locking section 4132a and the first lower locking section 4142a while the door body 20a continues to be opened.
同样的,当第二轴体312a位于第二上锁止段4152a及第二下锁止段4162a处时,由于第一切换件401a与第二切换件402a是相互错开的,原本相互重合的第二上自由段4151a与第二下自由段4161a也会相互错开,此时相互错开的第二上自由段4151a与第二下自由段4161a限制第二轴体312a脱离第二上锁止段4152a及第二下锁止段4162a,即可保证在门体20a继续开启的过程中第二轴体312a始终保持在第二上锁止段4152a及第二下锁止段4162a处。Similarly, when the second shaft 312a is located at the second upper locking section 4152a and the second lower locking section 4162a, since the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a are mutually staggered, the originally overlapping first The second upper free section 4151a and the second lower free section 4161a will also be staggered. At this time, the second upper free section 4151a and the second lower free section 4161a are mutually staggered to restrict the second shaft 312a from separating from the second upper locking section 4152a and The second lower locking section 4162a can ensure that the second shaft 312a is always maintained at the second upper locking section 4152a and the second lower locking section 4162a while the door 20a continues to be opened.
另外,第二切换件402a的转动角度大于第一切换件401a的转动角度,即第二切换件402a与第一切换件401a之间相互错开,可进一步提高第一铰链件31a与切换组件40a之间的锁止效果,确保第一轴体311a始终保持在第一上锁止段4132a及第一下锁止段4142a处,且第二轴体312a始终保持在第二上锁止段4152a及第二下锁止段4162a处。In addition, the rotation angle of the second switching element 402a is greater than the rotation angle of the first switching element 401a, that is, the second switching element 402a and the first switching element 401a are staggered with each other, which can further improve the relationship between the first hinge element 31a and the switching assembly 40a. The locking effect ensures that the first shaft body 311a is always maintained at the first upper locking section 4132a and the first lower locking section 4142a, and the second shaft body 312a is always maintained at the second upper locking section 4152a and the second upper locking section 4142a. At the second locking section 4162a.
同时,当第一切换件401a及第二切换件402a相对运动时,位于第一切换件401a上的第三轴体321a与位于第二切换件402a上的第四轴体322a之间的间距发生变化,而第三轴体321a始终位于第三自由段4211a,第四轴体322a则由第四限位段4222a移动至第四自由段4221a,即第四轴体322a脱离第四限位段4222a。At the same time, when the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a move relatively, the distance between the third shaft 321a located on the first switching element 401a and the fourth shaft 322a located on the second switching element 402a occurs. The third shaft body 321a is always located in the third free section 4211a, and the fourth shaft body 322a moves from the fourth limit section 4222a to the fourth free section 4221a, that is, the fourth shaft body 322a leaves the fourth limit section 4222a .
结合图49至图52,当门体20a处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至第二中间开启角度α21的过程中时,第一切换件401a与第二切换件402a相对静止,第四轴体322a于移动段M1内运动而带动第三轴体321a由起始位置B1运动至枢转位置B2,门体由容纳腔室S朝向枢转侧P移动而使得侧棱23a保持在外侧面13a靠近容纳腔室S的一侧。With reference to Figures 49 to 52, when the door body 20a is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle α2 to the second intermediate opening angle α21, the first switching member 401a and the second switching member 402a are relatively stationary, and the fourth shaft body 322a moves in the moving section M1 to drive the third shaft 321a to move from the starting position B1 to the pivoting position B2. The door moves from the containing chamber S to the pivoting side P so that the side edge 23a is kept on the outer surface 13a close to the containing One side of chamber S.
需要说明的是,在本实施方式中,起始位置B1与枢转位置B2的连线平行于移动段M1,也就是说,此时门体20a可以是不发生转动而只是发生平移,但不以此为限,在其他实施方式中,也可以是门体20a边转动边远离箱体10a运动。It should be noted that in this embodiment, the line connecting the starting position B1 and the pivoting position B2 is parallel to the moving section M1, that is, at this time, the door body 20a may not rotate but only translate, but not With this limitation, in other embodiments, the door body 20a may also move away from the box body 10a while rotating.
可以理解的,当门体20a处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至第二中间开启角度α21的过程中时,若门体20a相对箱体10a原地转动,侧棱23a会逐渐朝靠近容纳腔室S的一侧移动,同时,门体20a逐渐靠近容纳腔室S移动,门体20a会阻碍箱体10a内的抽屉、搁物架等的开启,即会降低箱体10a的开度。It is understandable that when the door body 20a is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle α2 to the second intermediate opening angle α21, if the door body 20a rotates in situ relative to the box body 10a, the side edge 23a will gradually move closer to the receiving cavity. One side of the chamber S moves, and at the same time, the door body 20a gradually moves closer to the containing chamber S. The door body 20a will obstruct the opening of the drawers, shelves, etc. in the box body 10a, that is, reduce the opening degree of the box body 10a.
而本实施方式的铰链组件30a可通过门体20a的平移使得门体20a尽量远离箱体10a,保证箱体10a的开度,避免箱体10a内的抽屉、搁物架等受门体20a干涉而无法打开的问题,又可以避免侧棱23a朝远离容纳腔室S的方向凸伸出外侧面13a。The hinge assembly 30a of this embodiment can move the door body 20a as far away from the box body 10a as possible through the translation of the door body 20a, ensuring the opening of the box body 10a, and avoiding the drawers and shelves in the box body 10a from being interfered by the door body 20a. The problem of inability to open can also prevent the side edge 23a from protruding out of the outer surface 13a in a direction away from the containing chamber S.
结合图53至图56,当门体20a处于由第二中间开启角度α21继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第一切换件401a与第二切换件402a相对静止,第三轴体321a保持在枢转位置B2,第四轴体322a以第三轴体321a为圆心而于转动段M2运动,门体20a相对箱体10a继续原地转动。With reference to Figures 53 to 56, when the door body 20a is in the process of continuing to open from the second intermediate opening angle α21 to the maximum opening angle α3, the first switching element 401a and the second switching element 402a are relatively stationary, and the third shaft body 321a Keeping at the pivoting position B2, the fourth shaft 322a moves in the rotating section M2 with the third shaft 321a as the center, and the door 20a continues to rotate in situ relative to the box 10a.
这里,第一开启角度α1的范围大致为80°~83°,第二开启角度α2大约为90°,最大开启角度α3大于90°,也就是说,在门体20a开启至80°~83°的过程中,门体20a先沿第一方向X产生位移,避免门体20a在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉,最后达到80°~83°,此后,门体20a在继续打开至90°的过程中,切换组件40a产生运动而使得门体20a更换旋转轴继续转动,即在90°之后门体20a沿第二方向Y产生位移,避免门体20a阻碍箱体10a内的抽屉、搁物架等的开启,而后门体20a以第三轴体321a为旋转轴相对箱体10a继续原地转动而进一步打开门体20a。Here, the range of the first opening angle α1 is approximately 80°-83°, the second opening angle α2 is approximately 90°, and the maximum opening angle α3 is greater than 90°, that is, the door body 20a opens to 80°-83° During the process, the door body 20a is first displaced in the first direction X to avoid interference between the door body 20a and the surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process, and finally reaches 80°~83°. After that, the door body 20a continues In the process of opening to 90°, the switch assembly 40a moves to make the door body 20a replace the rotating shaft and continue to rotate, that is, the door body 20a is displaced in the second direction Y after 90°, so as to prevent the door body 20a from obstructing the inside of the box body 10a. The drawers, shelves, etc. are opened, and the rear door body 20a uses the third shaft body 321a as a rotation axis to continue to rotate in situ relative to the box body 10a to further open the door body 20a.
可以理解的是,角度不以上述说明为限。It can be understood that the angle is not limited to the above description.
可以看到,本实施方式通过切换组件40a对第一铰链件31a、第二铰链件32a的解锁、锁止作用,可以有效控制第一铰链件31a及第二铰链件32a的顺序切换,使得门体20a可稳定开启。It can be seen that this embodiment can effectively control the sequence switching of the first hinge part 31a and the second hinge part 32a through the unlocking and locking effect of the switching assembly 40a on the first hinge part 31a and the second hinge part 32a, so that the door The body 20a can be stably opened.
可以理解的,当门体20a处于闭合过程中时,即门体20a由最大开启角度α3开始闭合时,切换组件40a也可有效控制第一铰链件31a及第二铰链件32a的顺序切换,即当门体20a处于由最大开启角度α3闭合至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第三轴体321a于第三自由段4211a运动,第四轴体322a于第四自由段4221a运动,且切换组件40a锁止第一铰链件31a,当门体20a处于由第二开启角度α2闭合至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一切换件401a及第二切换件402a相对运动而使得第一铰链件31a脱离切换组件40a的限位,且第四轴体322a限位于第四限位段4222a,切换组件40a锁止第二铰链件32a,当门体20a处于由第一开启角度α1闭合至完全闭合的过程中时,第一轴体311a于第一自由段S1运动,第二轴体312a于第二自由段S2运动。It can be understood that when the door body 20a is in the process of closing, that is, when the door body 20a starts to close from the maximum opening angle α3, the switching assembly 40a can also effectively control the sequence switching of the first hinge member 31a and the second hinge member 32a, namely When the door 20a is in the process of closing from the maximum opening angle α3 to the second opening angle α2, the third shaft 321a moves in the third free section 4211a, and the fourth shaft 322a moves in the fourth free section 4221a, and switches The assembly 40a locks the first hinge member 31a. When the door body 20a is in the process of closing from the second opening angle α2 to the first opening angle α1, the first switching member 401a and the second switching member 402a move relative to each other so that the first The hinge member 31a is out of the limit of the switching assembly 40a, and the fourth shaft body 322a is limited to the fourth limit section 4222a. The switching assembly 40a locks the second hinge member 32a. When the door body 20a is closed from the first opening angle α1 to In the process of being completely closed, the first shaft body 311a moves in the first free section S1, and the second shaft body 312a moves in the second free section S2.
换句话说,门体20a的闭合过程与门体20a的开启过程是顺序相反的过程,通过切换组件40a对第一铰链件31a、第二铰链件32a的解锁、锁止作用,可以有效控制门体20a开启、闭合过程中第一铰链件31a、第二铰链件32a的切换顺序。In other words, the closing process of the door body 20a and the opening process of the door body 20a are in the opposite sequence. The unlocking and locking functions of the first hinge member 31a and the second hinge member 32a by the switching assembly 40a can effectively control the door. The switching sequence of the first hinge part 31a and the second hinge part 32a during the opening and closing of the body 20a.
在本实施方式中,第一轴体311a的中心与侧棱23a之间为第一间距,第一轴体311a的中心与前壁21a之间为第二间距,第一轴体311a的中心与侧壁22a之间为第三间距,当门体20a处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一间距、第二间距及第三间距均呈减小趋势。In this embodiment, the center of the first shaft body 311a and the side edges 23a are at a first distance, the center of the first shaft body 311a and the front wall 21a are at a second distance, and the center of the first shaft body 311a is There is a third distance between the side walls 22a. When the door body 20a is opened from the closed state to the first opening angle α1, the first distance, the second distance, and the third distance all show a decreasing trend.
另外,第三轴体312a的中心与侧棱23a之间为第四间距,第三轴体312a的中心与前壁21a之间为第五间距,第三轴体312a的中心与侧壁22a之间为第六间距,当门体20a处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第四间距、第五间距及第六间距均先呈增大趋势后保持不变。In addition, there is a fourth distance between the center of the third shaft 312a and the side edges 23a, the fifth distance between the center of the third shaft 312a and the front wall 21a, and the distance between the center of the third shaft 312a and the side wall 22a The interval is the sixth interval. When the door body 20a is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle α2 to the maximum opening angle α3, the fourth interval, the fifth interval and the sixth interval all increase first and then remain unchanged .
需要说明的是,间距变化不以上述说明为限,例如,当门体20a处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第五间距始终保持不变,而第四间距及第六间距均先呈增大趋势后保持不变等等。It should be noted that the distance change is not limited to the above description. For example, when the door body 20a is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle α2 to the maximum opening angle α3, the fifth distance always remains unchanged, and the fourth The distance and the sixth distance both increase first and then remain unchanged, and so on.
另外,在本实施方式中,第一轴体311a与第三轴体321a相互错开,如此,可适用于嵌入式橱柜或容纳冰箱100a的空间较小的场景。In addition, in this embodiment, the first shaft body 311a and the third shaft body 321a are staggered from each other, so that it can be applied to a scene where a built-in cabinet or a space for accommodating the refrigerator 100a is small.
本实施方式的其他说明可以参考上一实施方式,在此不再赘述。For other descriptions of this embodiment, reference may be made to the previous embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本实施方式中,结合图57至图60,冰箱100为带有走线模块60的冰箱100。In this embodiment, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60, the refrigerator 100 is a refrigerator 100 with a wiring module 60.
走线模块60包括相对设置的固定端61及自由端62,固定端61连接门体20,自由端62可活动地设置于箱体10,箱体10的走线E依次经过自由端62及固定端61而延伸至门体20。The wiring module 60 includes a fixed end 61 and a free end 62 that are arranged oppositely. The fixed end 61 is connected to the door body 20. The free end 62 is movably arranged on the box body 10. The wiring E of the box body 10 passes through the free end 62 and the fixed end in turn. The end 61 extends to the door body 20.
这里,“自由端62可活动地设置于箱体10”是指自由端62与箱体10之间不固定,随着门体20开启,自由端62可相对箱体10运动,进而使得位于走线模块60中的走线E也可随着门体20开启自由活动。Here, "the free end 62 is movably arranged on the box body 10" means that the free end 62 and the box body 10 are not fixed. As the door body 20 is opened, the free end 62 can move relative to the box body 10, so that the free end 62 can move relative to the box body 10. The wire E in the wire module 60 can also move freely as the door 20 is opened.
需要说明的是,随着冰箱100的智能化及多功能化,冰箱100门体20上通常会设置一些功能模块,例如制冰模块、显示模块等等,该些模块通常需要通过走线E与箱体10中的控制模块连接,本实施方式的走线E通过走线模块60延伸至门体20,可有效避免在门体20开闭过程中出现走线E被拉扯的现象,且可适应各种运动轨迹的门体20,例如当铰链组件30驱动门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动时,走线E的延伸轨迹也会发生变化,本实施方式通过走线模块60的设计可完全适应门体20的这种移动,即可通过走线模块60灵活调节走线E的延伸轨迹,避免卡线。It should be noted that as the refrigerator 100 becomes more intelligent and multifunctional, some functional modules, such as an ice making module, a display module, etc., are usually provided on the door 20 of the refrigerator 100. These modules usually need to be connected to the The control module in the box 10 is connected. The wiring E of this embodiment extends to the door 20 through the wiring module 60, which can effectively avoid the phenomenon that the wiring E is pulled during the opening and closing process of the door 20, and can be adapted to The door body 20 with various motion trajectories, for example, when the hinge assembly 30 drives the door body 20 to move from the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S, the extension trajectory of the wiring E will also change. In this embodiment, the wiring module 60 is used. The design can be fully adapted to this movement of the door body 20, and the extension track of the wiring E can be flexibly adjusted by the wiring module 60 to avoid wire jamming.
在本实施方式中,冰箱100还包括限位空间101,限位空间101包括朝向门体20设置的槽口1011,走线模块60的固定端61穿过槽口1011而连接门体20,当门体20处于打开过程中时,门体20带动走线模块60于限位空间101内运动,且自由端62始终位于限位空间101内。In this embodiment, the refrigerator 100 further includes a limiting space 101. The limiting space 101 includes a notch 1011 disposed toward the door body 20. The fixed end 61 of the cable routing module 60 passes through the notch 1011 to connect to the door body 20. When the door body 20 is in the process of opening, the door body 20 drives the wire routing module 60 to move in the limiting space 101, and the free end 62 is always located in the limiting space 101.
这里,限位空间101位于箱体10的顶部11,走线模块60平行于箱体10的顶部11设置,且固定端61活动连接门体20,当然,限位空间101也可设置于其他区域。Here, the limiting space 101 is located at the top 11 of the box body 10, the wiring module 60 is arranged parallel to the top 11 of the box body 10, and the fixed end 61 is movably connected to the door body 20. Of course, the limiting space 101 can also be set in other areas .
具体的,在本实施方式中,走线模块60包括第一壳体601及第二壳体602,第二壳体602邻近箱体10的顶部11设置,第一壳体601相对第二壳体602远离箱体10的顶部11,第一壳体601及第二壳体602相互配合形成容纳走线E的容纳腔体603,容纳腔体603的两端开口为固定端61及自由端62。Specifically, in this embodiment, the wiring module 60 includes a first housing 601 and a second housing 602. The second housing 602 is disposed adjacent to the top 11 of the box 10, and the first housing 601 is opposite to the second housing 602. 602 is away from the top 11 of the box 10, the first housing 601 and the second housing 602 cooperate with each other to form an accommodating cavity 603 for accommodating the wire E. The two ends of the accommodating cavity 603 are opened as a fixed end 61 and a free end 62.
门体20朝上方凸伸出箱体10的顶部11,顶部11靠近门体20的边缘设有凸伸出顶部11的止挡111,止挡111处开设有槽口1011,冰箱100包括凸伸出顶部11的若干突出部112,若干突出部112围设形成限位空间101。The door body 20 protrudes upwards from the top 11 of the box body 10. The edge of the top 11 close to the door 20 is provided with a stop 111 protruding from the top 11, and the stop 111 is provided with a notch 1011. The refrigerator 100 includes a protrusion A plurality of protrusions 112 of the top portion 11 are formed, and the plurality of protrusions 112 are enclosed to form a limiting space 101.
这里,第一铰链件31固定于顶部11的边缘位置,且为了适应门体20凸伸出顶部11的设计,铰链组件30的第一铰链件31大致呈Z型,如此,第一铰链件31可由箱体10顶部11延伸至门体20的顶部而与位于门体20顶部的切换组件40相互适配,而若干突出部112包括位于第一铰链件31与走线模块60之间的第一突出部1121及与第一突出部1121间隔设置的第二突出部1122,第一突出部1121可避免走线模块60与第一铰链件31相互干扰,且第 一突出部1121的轮廓与走线模块60的运动轨迹相适应,第二突出部1122可为若干凸柱,以减小走线模块60与第二突出部1122的撞击。Here, the first hinge member 31 is fixed at the edge position of the top 11, and in order to adapt to the design of the door body 20 protruding from the top 11, the first hinge member 31 of the hinge assembly 30 is roughly Z-shaped. Thus, the first hinge member 31 It can be extended from the top 11 of the box body 10 to the top of the door body 20 to be compatible with the switching assembly 40 on the top of the door body 20, and the plurality of protrusions 112 include a first hinge between the first hinge part 31 and the cable routing module 60. The protruding portion 1121 and the second protruding portion 1122 are spaced apart from the first protruding portion 1121. The first protruding portion 1121 can prevent the wiring module 60 from interfering with the first hinge member 31, and the outline of the first protruding portion 1121 and the wiring The movement trajectory of the module 60 is adapted, and the second protrusion 1122 may be a plurality of protrusions to reduce the collision between the wiring module 60 and the second protrusion 1122.
冰箱100还可以包括罩体103,罩体103位于顶部11并覆盖限位空间101、第一铰链件31等等,罩体103可与止挡111相互适配,且罩体103的形状可根据具体需求而定。The refrigerator 100 may further include a cover body 103, which is located on the top 11 and covers the limiting space 101, the first hinge member 31, etc. The cover body 103 can be adapted to the stop 111, and the shape of the cover body 103 can be adjusted according to It depends on specific needs.
另外,走线模块60的固定端61及槽口1011均靠近铰链组件30设置,可以理解的,在门体20开启过程中,走线模块60会暴露于门体20开启间隙内,将固定端61及槽口1011靠近铰链组件30设置,一方面,可合理控制走线模块60的运动轨迹,另一方面,可避免走线模块60影响外观及冰箱100的正常使用。In addition, the fixed end 61 and the notch 1011 of the cable routing module 60 are located close to the hinge assembly 30. It can be understood that during the opening process of the door body 20, the cable routing module 60 will be exposed in the opening gap of the door body 20, and the fixed end 61 and the notch 1011 are arranged close to the hinge assembly 30. On the one hand, the movement trajectory of the wiring module 60 can be reasonably controlled, and on the other hand, it can prevent the wiring module 60 from affecting the appearance and normal use of the refrigerator 100.
走线模块60呈水平设置并经过槽口1011延伸至门体20处,门体20内设有走线孔H,走线E从固定端61伸出并由走线孔H延伸至门体20内部,邻近走线孔H的区域C与固定端61区域枢轴连接,且门体20包括覆盖固定端61、走线孔H及区域C的盖体24,如此,便可实现走线模块60与门体20的活动连接,当门体20处于开启过程中时,门体20带动走线模块60运动,走线模块60在限位空间101内可按照不同的轨迹自由活动,也就是说,走线模块60的运动轨迹可完全适应门体20的运动轨迹,从而避免卡线。The wiring module 60 is arranged horizontally and extends through the slot 1011 to the door body 20. The door body 20 is provided with a wiring hole H, and the wiring E extends from the fixed end 61 and extends from the wiring hole H to the door body 20 Inside, the area C adjacent to the wiring hole H is pivotally connected to the fixed end 61 area, and the door body 20 includes a cover 24 covering the fixed end 61, the wiring hole H and the area C. In this way, the wiring module 60 can be realized The movable connection with the door body 20, when the door body 20 is in the opening process, the door body 20 drives the wire routing module 60 to move, and the wire routing module 60 can move freely according to different trajectories in the limit space 101, that is, The movement trajectory of the wiring module 60 can be completely adapted to the movement trajectory of the door body 20, thereby avoiding wire jamming.
另外,走线模块60包括圆弧段D,可进一步避免走线E在容纳腔体603内部被干扰。In addition, the wiring module 60 includes a circular arc segment D, which can further prevent the wiring E from being disturbed inside the receiving cavity 603.
需要说明的是,为了避免走线模块60的磨损及滑动噪音,可在走线模块60的第二壳体602及箱体10的顶部11之间设置缓冲部件或滑动部件等,具体可根据实际情况而定。It should be noted that, in order to avoid the wear and sliding noise of the wiring module 60, a buffer member or sliding member, etc. can be provided between the second housing 602 of the wiring module 60 and the top 11 of the box body 10, which may be based on actual conditions. It depends on the situation.
在本实施方式中,限位空间101的槽口1011具有第一槽口宽度,走线模块60包括位于固定端61及自由端62之间的活动部63,第一槽口宽度大于活动部63的最大宽度。In this embodiment, the notch 1011 of the limiting space 101 has a first notch width, the wiring module 60 includes a movable portion 63 located between the fixed end 61 and the free end 62, and the first notch width is larger than the movable portion 63 The maximum width.
也就是说,随着门体20开启,活动部63逐渐凸伸出限位空间101,而第一槽口宽度大于活动部63的最大宽度,可避免槽口1011限制活动部63凸伸出限位空间101,且槽口1011可一定程度控制走线模块60的运动轨迹,避免走线模块60运动幅度过大而脱离限位空间101。That is, as the door 20 is opened, the movable portion 63 gradually protrudes out of the limiting space 101, and the width of the first notch is greater than the maximum width of the movable portion 63, which can prevent the notch 1011 from restricting the protruding limit of the movable portion 63. The position space 101 and the notch 1011 can control the movement trajectory of the wiring module 60 to a certain extent, so as to prevent the wiring module 60 from moving out of the limit space 101 due to excessive movement.
这里,为了进一步避免走线模块60脱离限位空间101,可将自由端62设置成弯折状,即自由端62与活动部63之间形成一夹角。Here, in order to further prevent the wiring module 60 from leaving the limiting space 101, the free end 62 may be arranged in a bent shape, that is, an included angle is formed between the free end 62 and the movable portion 63.
以上实施例仅用以说明本发明的技术方案而非限制,尽管参照较佳实施例对本发明进行了详细说明,例如,不同的实施例中的技术若可叠加使用以同时达到对应的效果,其方案也在本发明的保护范围内。本领域的普通技术人员应当理解,可以对本发明的技术方案进行修改或者等同替换,而不脱离本发明技术方案的精神和范围。The above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the present invention and not to limit it. Although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to preferred embodiments, for example, if the technologies in different embodiments can be used in combination to achieve corresponding effects at the same time, The solution is also within the protection scope of the present invention. Those of ordinary skill in the art should understand that the technical solution of the present invention can be modified or equivalently replaced without departing from the spirit and scope of the technical solution of the present invention.

Claims (20)

  1. 一种带有切换组件的冰箱,其特征在于,包括箱体、用以打开和关闭箱体的门体以及连接箱体及门体的铰链组件,箱体包括容纳腔室及连接铰链组件的枢转侧,所述铰链组件包括第一铰链件、第二铰链件以及连接所述第一铰链件及所述第二铰链件的切换组件,当所述门体处于开启过程中时,所述第一铰链件先相对所述切换组件运动,而后所述第二铰链件相对所述切换组件运动,其中,所述铰链组件先驱动所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后所述铰链组件驱动所述门体由所述容纳腔室朝向所述枢转侧移动。A refrigerator with a switch assembly, which is characterized by comprising a box body, a door body for opening and closing the box body, and a hinge assembly connecting the box body and the door body. The box body includes a receiving chamber and a pivot connecting the hinge assembly. On the turning side, the hinge assembly includes a first hinge part, a second hinge part, and a switching assembly connecting the first hinge part and the second hinge part. When the door is in the process of opening, the first hinge part A hinge element first moves relative to the switching assembly, and then the second hinge element moves relative to the switching assembly, wherein the hinge assembly first drives the door body to move from the pivoting side toward the accommodating chamber, and then the The hinge assembly drives the door body to move from the accommodating chamber toward the pivot side.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一铰链件固定于所述箱体,所述第二铰链件固定于所述门体,所述切换组件包括第一配合件及第二配合件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一铰链件与所述第一配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后所述第一铰链件与所述第一配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体由容纳腔室朝向枢转侧移动,且所述第二配合件限位所述第二铰链件,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第二铰链件脱离所述第二配合件的限位,且所述第一配合件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第二铰链件与所述第二配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动。The refrigerator according to claim 1, wherein the first hinge member is fixed to the box body, the second hinge member is fixed to the door body, and the switching assembly includes a first matching member and a second hinge member. Two mating parts, when the door body is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the first hinge part and the first mating part move relative to each other to drive the door body from the pivoting side toward The accommodating chamber moves, and then the first hinge member and the first matching member move relative to each other to drive the door body to move from the accommodating chamber toward the pivot side, and the second matching member limits the second The hinge part, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle, the second hinge part is separated from the limit of the second matching part, and the first matching part Limiting the first hinge part, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the second hinge part and the second matching part move relative to each other to drive the The door body rotates in situ relative to the box body.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一铰链件固定于所述箱体,所述第二铰链件固定于所述门体,所述切换组件包括第一配合件及第二配合件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一铰链件与所述第一配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,且所述第二配合件限位所述第二铰链件,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第二铰链件脱离所述第二配合件的限位,且所述第一配合件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第二铰链件与所述第二配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体由容纳腔室朝向枢转侧移动,而后所述第一铰链件与所述第二配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动。The refrigerator according to claim 1, wherein the first hinge member is fixed to the box body, the second hinge member is fixed to the door body, and the switching assembly includes a first matching member and a second hinge member. Two mating parts, when the door body is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the first hinge part and the first mating part move relative to each other to drive the door body from the pivoting side toward The accommodating chamber moves, and the second matching member limits the second hinge member. When the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle, the second hinge member When the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle. The second hinge member and the second matching member move relative to each other to drive the door body to move from the accommodating chamber toward the pivoting side, and then the first hinge member and the second matching member move relative to each other to drive the door The door body rotates in situ relative to the box body.
  4. 根据权利要求2或3所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述箱体包括邻近所述铰链组件且在所述门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述门体包括远离所述容纳腔室的前壁及始终夹设于所述前壁及所述容纳腔室之间的侧壁,所述前壁与所述侧壁之间具有侧棱,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述侧棱运动至位于所述外侧面靠近所述容纳腔室的一侧。The refrigerator according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the box body includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on an extension section of the door body rotation path, and the door body includes an outer surface away from the accommodating cavity The front wall of the chamber and the side wall always sandwiched between the front wall and the containing chamber, there is a side edge between the front wall and the side wall, when the door is opened from the closed state In the process of reaching the first opening angle, the side edge moves to a side of the outer side surface close to the containing chamber.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述切换组件包括相互配合的第一切换件及第二切换件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中或是处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件相对所述第二切换件运动而使得所述第二铰链件脱离所述第二配合件的限位,且所述第一配合件限位所述第一铰链件。The refrigerator according to claim 4, wherein the switching assembly includes a first switching element and a second switching element that cooperate with each other, and when the door is opened from a closed state to a first opening angle, or When it is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the first switching element and the second switching element are relatively static, and when the door body is at the first opening angle, it continues to open to the second During the opening angle process, the first switching element moves relative to the second switching element, so that the second hinge element is separated from the limit of the second matching element, and the first matching element is limited in position. Mentioned first hinge member.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一铰链件与所述第一配合件之间通过相互配合的第一轴体组及第一槽体组实现相对运动,所述第二铰链件与所述第二配合件之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组及第二槽体组实现相对运动,所述第一轴体组包括第一轴体及第二轴体,所述第一槽体组包括与所述第一轴体配合的第一槽体及与所述第二轴体配合的第二槽体,所述第二轴体组包括第三轴体及第四轴体,所述第二槽体组包括与所述第三轴体配合的第三槽体及与所述第四轴体配合的第四槽体。The refrigerator according to claim 5, wherein the first hinge member and the first matching member realize relative movement through a first shaft body group and a first groove body group that cooperate with each other, and the first hinge member and the first matching member realize relative movement. The two hinge parts and the second matching part realize relative movement through the second shaft body group and the second groove body group that cooperate with each other. The first shaft body group includes a first shaft body and a second shaft body, so The first groove body group includes a first groove body matched with the first shaft body and a second groove body matched with the second shaft body, and the second shaft body group includes a third shaft body and a fourth shaft body. A shaft body, the second groove body group includes a third groove body matched with the third shaft body and a fourth groove body matched with the fourth shaft body.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一铰链件包括所述第一轴体及所述第二轴体,所述第一配合件包括所述第一槽体及所述第二槽体,所述第二配合件包括所述第三轴体及所述第四轴体,所述第二铰链件包括所述第三槽体及所述第四槽体,所述第一槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第一上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第一下槽体,所述第一上槽体包括第一上自由段,所述第一下槽体包括第一下自由段,所述第二槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第二上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第二下槽体,所述第二上槽体包括第二上自由段,所述第二下槽体包括第二下自由段,所述第三槽体包括第三自由段,所述第四槽体包括第四自由段,所述第一槽体组包括锁止段,所述第二槽体组包括限位段,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止,所述第一上自由段与所述第一下自由段重合形成第一自由段,所述第二上自由段与所述第二下自由段重合形成第二自由段,所述第一轴体于所述第一自由段运动,所述第二轴体于所述第二自由段运动,所述第三轴体和/或所述第四轴体限位于所述限位段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第二铰链件,当所述 门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件及所述第二切换件相对运动而使得所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,且所述第一轴体和/或所述第二轴体限位于所述锁止段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体于所述第三自由段内运动,所述第四轴体于所述第四自由段运动。The refrigerator according to claim 6, wherein the first hinge member includes the first shaft body and the second shaft body, and the first matching member includes the first groove body and the The second groove body, the second matching member includes the third shaft body and the fourth shaft body, the second hinge member includes the third groove body and the fourth groove body, the first A tank body includes a first upper tank body located in the first switching member and a first lower tank body located in the second switching member, the first upper tank body includes a first upper free section, the first The lower tank body includes a first lower free section, the second tank body includes a second upper tank body located on the first switching member and a second lower tank body located on the second switching member, the second upper The trough body includes a second upper free section, the second lower trough body includes a second lower free section, the third trough body includes a third free section, the fourth trough body includes a fourth free section, and the first A tank body group includes a locking section, and the second tank body group includes a limiting section. When the door body is in the process of opening from a closed state to a first opening angle, the first switching member and the The second switching member is relatively stationary, the first upper free section and the first lower free section overlap to form a first free section, and the second upper free section and the second lower free section overlap to form a second free section , The first shaft body moves in the first free section, the second shaft body moves in the second free section, and the third shaft body and/or the fourth shaft body is limited to the The limiting section causes the switching assembly to limit the second hinge member. When the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle, the first switching member and the The relative movement of the second switching member causes the fourth shaft body to escape from the limiting section, and the first shaft body and/or the second shaft body are limited to the locking section so that the switching assembly Limiting the first hinge member, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the third shaft body moves in the third free section, and the first The four-axis body moves in the fourth free section.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述锁止段包括位于所述第一上槽体的第一上锁止段、位于所述第一下槽体的第一下锁止段、位于所述第二上槽体的第二上锁止段及位于所述第二下槽体的第二下锁止段,所述限位段包括位于所述第四槽体的第四限位段,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体限位于所述第四限位段,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体同时限位于所述第一上锁止段及所述第一下锁止段,所述第二轴体同时限位于所述第二上锁止段及所述第二下锁止段,且所述第四轴体脱离所述第四限位段。The refrigerator according to claim 7, wherein the locking section comprises a first upper locking section located in the first upper tank, and a first lower locking section located in the first lower tank. , The second upper locking section located in the second upper tank body and the second lower locking section located in the second lower tank body, the limiting section includes a fourth limiting section located in the fourth tank body When the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the fourth shaft is limited to the fourth limiting section, and when the door is at the first opening angle In the process of continuing to open to the second opening angle, the first shaft is confined to the first upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time, and the second shaft is confined to the The second upper locking section and the second lower locking section, and the fourth shaft body is separated from the fourth limiting section.
  9. 根据权利要求7所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一自由段包括相对设置的初始位置及停止位置,所述第二自由段包括相连的第一段及第二段,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体位于所述初始位置,所述第二轴体位于所述第一段远离所述第二段的一端,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第二轴体于所述第一段内运动而带动所述第一轴体由所述初始位置运动至所述停止位置,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后所述第二轴体于所述第二段内运动而带动所述第一轴体朝向所述初始位置运动,所述门体由容纳腔室朝向枢转侧移动,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体于所述第三自由段内原地转动,所述第四轴体以所述第三轴体为圆心而于所述第四自由段运动。The refrigerator according to claim 7, wherein the first free section includes an initial position and a stop position that are relatively set, and the second free section includes a first section and a second section that are connected, when the door When the body is in the closed state, the first shaft is at the initial position, and the second shaft is at the end of the first section away from the second section. When the door is in the closed state, it opens to In the process of the first opening angle, the second shaft moves in the first section to drive the first shaft to move from the initial position to the stop position, and the door is pivoted The side moves toward the accommodating chamber, and then the second shaft moves in the second section to drive the first shaft to move toward the initial position, and the door moves from the accommodating chamber to the pivoting side , When the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the third shaft body rotates in situ in the third free section, and the fourth shaft body rotates at the first The triaxial body is the center of the circle and moves in the fourth free section.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第一间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第二间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第三间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第四间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第五间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第六间距,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一间距、所述第二间距及所述第三间距均先呈减小趋势后呈增大趋势,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四间距、所述第五间距及所述第六间距均保持不变。The refrigerator according to claim 9, wherein a first distance is formed between the center of the first shaft and the side edges, and a first distance is formed between the center of the first shaft and the front wall. Two pitches, the third pitch is between the center of the first shaft and the side walls, the fourth pitch is between the center of the third shaft and the side edges, and the There is a fifth distance between the center and the front wall, and the sixth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side wall. When the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle In the middle, the first distance, the second distance, and the third distance all show a decreasing trend first and then an increasing trend. When the door body is at a position where the door body continues to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle During the process, the fourth pitch, the fifth pitch, and the sixth pitch all remain unchanged.
  11. 根据权利要求7所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一自由段包括相对设置的初始位置及停止位置,所述第三自由段包括相对设置的起始位置及枢转位置,所述第四自由段包括相连的移动段及转动段,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体位于所述初始位置,所述第二轴体位于所述第二自由段的一端,所述第三轴体位于所述起始位置,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第二轴体于所述第二自由段内运动而带动所述第一轴体由所述初始位置运动至所述停止位置,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体于所述移动段内运动而带动所述第三轴体由所述起始位置运动至所述枢转位置,而后所述第三轴体于所述枢转位置原地转动,所述第四轴体以所述第三轴体为圆心而于所述转动段运动。The refrigerator according to claim 7, wherein the first free section includes a relatively set initial position and a stopping position, the third free section includes a relatively set starting position and a pivoting position, and the first free section includes a relatively set starting position and a pivoting position. The four free sections include a connected moving section and a rotating section. When the door body is in the closed state, the first shaft is located at the initial position, and the second shaft is located at one end of the second free section, The third shaft is located at the starting position, and when the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the second shaft moves in the second free section to drive The first shaft body moves from the initial position to the stop position, and the door body moves from the pivoting side toward the accommodation chamber. When the door body is at a position where the door body continues to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle During the process, the fourth shaft moves in the moving section to drive the third shaft to move from the starting position to the pivot position, and then the third shaft moves on the pivot The rotation position rotates in situ, and the fourth shaft body moves in the rotation section with the third shaft body as the center of the circle.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第一间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第二间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第三间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第四间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第五间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第六间距,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一间距、所述第二间距及所述第三间距均呈减小趋势,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四间距、所述第五间距及所述第六间距均先呈增大趋势后保持不变。The refrigerator according to claim 11, wherein a first distance is formed between the center of the first shaft and the side edges, and a first distance is formed between the center of the first shaft and the front wall. Two pitches, the third pitch is between the center of the first shaft and the side walls, the fourth pitch is between the center of the third shaft and the side edges, and the There is a fifth distance between the center and the front wall, and the sixth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side wall. When the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle In the middle, the first distance, the second distance, and the third distance all show a decreasing trend. When the door is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the The fourth pitch, the fifth pitch, and the sixth pitch all show an increasing trend first and then remain unchanged.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一切换件包括所述第三轴体,所述第二切换件具有通孔,所述第三轴体通过所述通孔而延伸至所述第三槽体,所述第二切换件包括所述第四轴体,所述第四轴体延伸至所述第四槽体。The refrigerator according to claim 12, wherein the first switching member includes the third shaft, the second switching member has a through hole, and the third shaft extends through the through hole To the third groove body, the second switching member includes the fourth shaft body, and the fourth shaft body extends to the fourth groove body.
  14. 根据权利要求7所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述箱体包括开口及环绕所述开口设置的前端面,所述第一轴体与所述前端面之间具有第一距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述前端面之间具有第二距离,所述第二距离大于所述第一距离,所述冰箱还包括邻近铰链组件且在门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述第一轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第三距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第四距离,所述第四距离小于所述 第三距离。The refrigerator according to claim 7, wherein the box body includes an opening and a front end surface disposed around the opening, and there is a first distance between the first shaft body and the front end surface, and when the When the door is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a second distance between the third shaft and the front end surface, and the second distance is greater than the first distance, so The refrigerator also includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door rotation path. There is a third distance between the first shaft body and the outer side surface. When the door body is at a second opening angle, the When opening to the maximum opening angle, there is a fourth distance between the third shaft body and the outer side surface, and the fourth distance is smaller than the third distance.
  15. 一种带有切换组件的冰箱,其特征在于,包括箱体、用以打开和关闭箱体的门体以及连接箱体及门体的铰链组件,箱体包括容纳腔室及连接铰链组件的枢转侧,所述铰链组件包括固定于所述箱体的第一铰链件、固定于所述门体的第二铰链件以及连接所述第一铰链件及所述第二铰链件的切换组件,所述第一铰链件与所述切换组件之间通过相互配合的第一轴体组及第一槽体组实现相对运动,所述第一轴体组包括第一轴体及第二轴体,所述第一槽体组包括第一自由段、第二自由段及锁止段,所述第一自由段包括相对设置的初始位置及停止位置,所述第二自由段包括相连的第一段及第二段,所述第二铰链件与所述切换组件之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组及第二槽体组实现相对运动,所述第二轴体组包括第三轴体及第四轴体,所述第二槽体组包括第三自由段、第四自由段及限位段,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体位于所述初始位置,所述第二轴体位于所述第一段远离所述第二段的一端,且所述第四轴体位于所述限位段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第二铰链件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第二轴体于所述第一段内运动而带动所述第一轴体由所述初始位置运动至所述停止位置,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后所述第二轴体于所述第二段内运动而带动所述第一轴体朝向所述初始位置运动,所述门体由容纳腔室朝向枢转侧移动,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,且所述第一轴体和/或所述第二轴体限位于所述锁止段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体于所述第三自由段内原地转动,所述第四轴体以所述第三轴体为圆心而于所述第四自由段运动。A refrigerator with a switch assembly, which is characterized by comprising a box body, a door body for opening and closing the box body, and a hinge assembly connecting the box body and the door body. The box body includes a receiving chamber and a pivot connecting the hinge assembly. On the turning side, the hinge assembly includes a first hinge part fixed to the box body, a second hinge part fixed to the door body, and a switching assembly connecting the first hinge part and the second hinge part, The first hinge member and the switching assembly realize relative movement through a first shaft body group and a first groove body group that cooperate with each other, and the first shaft body group includes a first shaft body and a second shaft body, The first tank body group includes a first free section, a second free section, and a locking section, the first free section includes an initial position and a stop position that are relatively disposed, and the second free section includes a connected first section And in the second paragraph, the second hinge member and the switching assembly achieve relative movement through a second shaft body group and a second groove body group that cooperate with each other, and the second shaft body group includes a third shaft body and The fourth shaft body, the second groove body group includes a third free section, a fourth free section and a limiting section. When the door body is in the closed state, the first shaft body is located at the initial position, so The second shaft body is located at an end of the first section away from the second section, and the fourth shaft body is located at the limiting section so that the switching assembly limits the second hinge member. When the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the second shaft moves in the first section to drive the first shaft to move from the initial position to the stop Position, the door body moves from the pivoting side toward the accommodating chamber, and then the second shaft body moves in the second section to drive the first shaft body to move toward the initial position, and the door body Moving from the containing chamber to the pivoting side, when the door is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle, the fourth shaft body is separated from the limiting section, and the first A shaft body and/or the second shaft body are confined to the locking section so that the switching assembly constrains the first hinge member. When the door body is at the second opening angle, it continues to open to the maximum opening During the angle process, the third shaft body rotates in situ in the third free section, and the fourth shaft body moves in the fourth free section with the third shaft body as a center.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一铰链件包括所述第一轴体及所述第二轴体,所述切换组件包括具有所述第一自由段的第一槽体、具有所述第二自由段的第二槽体、所述第三轴体及所述第四轴体,所述第二铰链件包括具有所述第三自由段的第三槽体及具有所述第四自由段的第四槽体,所述切换组件包括相互配合的第一切换件及第二切换件,所述第一槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第一上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第一下槽体,所述第一自由段包括位于所述第一上槽体的第一上自由段及位于所述第一下槽体的第一下自由段,所述第二槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第二上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第二下槽体,所述第二自由段包括位于所述第二上槽体的第二上自由段及位于所述第二下槽体的第二下自由段,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止,所述第一上自由段与所述第一下自由段重合形成所述第一自由段,所述第二上自由段与所述第二下自由段重合形成所述第二自由段,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件相对所述第二切换件运动而使得所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,且所述第一轴体和/或所述第二轴体限位于所述锁止段,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止。The refrigerator according to claim 15, wherein the first hinge member includes the first shaft body and the second shaft body, and the switching assembly includes a first groove having the first free section Body, a second groove body having the second free section, the third shaft body and the fourth shaft body, the second hinge member includes a third groove body having the third free section and a The fourth groove body of the fourth free section, the switching assembly includes a first switching piece and a second switching piece that cooperate with each other, and the first groove body includes a first upper groove body located on the first switching piece And a first lower tank located in the second switching element, the first free section includes a first upper free section located in the first upper tank and a first lower free section located in the first lower tank Section, the second tank body includes a second upper tank body located on the first switching member and a second lower tank body located on the second switching member, and the second free section includes a second upper tank body located on the second upper The second upper free section of the tank and the second lower free section of the second lower tank, when the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the first switching member Relatively static with the second switching member, the first upper free section and the first lower free section overlap to form the first free section, and the second upper free section overlaps the second lower free section The second free section is formed, and when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle, the first switching element moves relative to the second switching element so that the first switching element The four-axis body is separated from the limit section, and the first axle body and/or the second axle body is confined to the locking section. When the door body is at the second opening angle, it continues to open to the maximum opening During the angle process, the first switching element and the second switching element are relatively stationary.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述锁止段包括连通所述第一上自由段的第一上锁止段、连通所述第一下自由段的第一下锁止段、连通所述第二上自由段的第二上锁止段及连通所述第二下自由段的第二下锁止段,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体同时限位于所述第一上锁止段及所述第一下锁止段,所述第二轴体同时限位于所述第二上锁止段及所述第二下锁止段。The refrigerator according to claim 16, wherein the locking section comprises a first upper locking section communicating with the first upper free section, and a first lower locking section communicating with the first lower free section , The second upper locking section connected with the second upper free section and the second lower locking section connected with the second lower free section, when the door body is at the first opening angle to continue to open to the second opening When the angle is in progress, the first shaft body is confined to the first upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time, and the second shaft body is confined to the second upper locking section at the same time And the second lower locking section.
  18. 一种带有切换组件的冰箱,其特征在于,包括箱体、用以打开和关闭箱体的门体以及连接箱体及门体的铰链组件,箱体包括容纳腔室及连接铰链组件的枢转侧,所述铰链组件包括固定于所述箱体的第一铰链件、固定于所述门体的第二铰链件以及连接所述第一铰链件及所述第二铰链件的切换组件,所述第一铰链件与所述切换组件之间通过相互配合的第一轴体组及第一槽体组实现相对运动,所述第一轴体组包括第一轴体及第二轴体,所述第一槽体组包括第一自由段、第二自由段及锁止段,所述第一自由段包括相对设置的初始位置及停止位置,所述第二铰链件与所述切换组件之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组及第二槽体组实现相对运动,所述第二轴体组包括第三轴体及第四轴体,所述第二槽体组包括第三自由段、第四自由段及限位段,所述第三自由段包括相对设置的起始位置及枢转位置,所述第四自由段包括相连的移动段及转动段,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体位于所述初始位置,所述第二轴体位于所述第二自由段的一端,所述第三轴体位于所述起始位置,且所述第四轴体位于所述限位段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第二铰链件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第二轴体于所述第二自由段内运动而带动所述第一轴体由所述初始位置运动至所述停止位置,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第四 轴体脱离所述限位段,且所述第一轴体和/或所述第二轴体限位于所述锁止段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体于所述移动段内运动而带动所述第三轴体由所述起始位置运动至所述枢转位置,所述门体由容纳腔室朝向枢转侧移动,而后所述第三轴体于所述枢转位置原地转动,所述第四轴体以所述第三轴体为圆心而于所述转动段运动。A refrigerator with a switch assembly, which is characterized by comprising a box body, a door body for opening and closing the box body, and a hinge assembly connecting the box body and the door body. The box body includes a receiving chamber and a pivot connecting the hinge assembly. On the turning side, the hinge assembly includes a first hinge part fixed to the box body, a second hinge part fixed to the door body, and a switching assembly connecting the first hinge part and the second hinge part, The first hinge member and the switching assembly realize relative movement through a first shaft body group and a first groove body group that cooperate with each other, and the first shaft body group includes a first shaft body and a second shaft body, The first tank body group includes a first free section, a second free section, and a locking section. The first free section includes an initial position and a stop position that are relatively disposed. The relative movement is realized through the second shaft body group and the second groove body group that cooperate with each other. The second shaft body group includes a third shaft body and a fourth shaft body, and the second groove body group includes a third free section. , The fourth free section and the limit section, the third free section includes a relatively set starting position and pivoting position, the fourth free section includes a connected moving section and a rotating section, when the door is closed In the state, the first shaft is located at the initial position, the second shaft is located at one end of the second free section, the third shaft is located at the starting position, and the fourth shaft The body is located in the limiting section so that the switching assembly limits the second hinge member. When the door body is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the second shaft is in the position The movement in the second free section drives the first shaft to move from the initial position to the stop position. The door moves from the pivoting side toward the accommodation chamber. When the opening angle continues to open to the second opening angle, the fourth shaft is separated from the limiting section, and the first shaft and/or the second shaft is limited to the locking section The switching assembly limits the first hinge, and when the door is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the fourth shaft moves in the moving section While driving the third shaft to move from the starting position to the pivoting position, the door moves from the accommodating chamber toward the pivoting side, and then the third shaft is at the pivoting position. Ground rotation, the fourth shaft body moves in the rotating section with the third shaft body as the center of the circle.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一铰链件包括所述第一轴体及所述第二轴体,所述切换组件包括具有所述第一自由段的第一槽体、具有所述第二自由段的第二槽体、所述第三轴体及所述第四轴体,所述第二铰链件包括具有所述第三自由段的第三槽体及具有所述第四自由段的第四槽体,所述切换组件包括相互配合的第一切换件及第二切换件,所述第一槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第一上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第一下槽体,所述第一自由段包括位于所述第一上槽体的第一上自由段及位于所述第一下槽体的第一下自由段,所述第二槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第二上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第二下槽体,所述第二自由段包括位于所述第二上槽体的第二上自由段及位于所述第二下槽体的第二下自由段,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止,所述第一上自由段与所述第一下自由段重合形成所述第一自由段,所述第二上自由段与所述第二下自由段重合形成所述第二自由段,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件相对所述第二切换件运动而使得所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,且所述第一轴体和/或所述第二轴体限位于所述锁止段,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止。The refrigerator according to claim 18, wherein the first hinge member includes the first shaft body and the second shaft body, and the switching assembly includes a first groove having the first free section Body, a second groove body having the second free section, the third shaft body and the fourth shaft body, the second hinge member includes a third groove body having the third free section and a The fourth groove body of the fourth free section, the switching assembly includes a first switching piece and a second switching piece that cooperate with each other, and the first groove body includes a first upper groove body located on the first switching piece And a first lower tank located in the second switching element, the first free section includes a first upper free section located in the first upper tank and a first lower free section located in the first lower tank Section, the second tank body includes a second upper tank body located on the first switching member and a second lower tank body located on the second switching member, and the second free section includes a second upper tank body located on the second upper The second upper free section of the tank and the second lower free section of the second lower tank, when the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the first switching member Relatively static with the second switching member, the first upper free section and the first lower free section overlap to form the first free section, and the second upper free section overlaps the second lower free section The second free section is formed, and when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle, the first switching element moves relative to the second switching element so that the first switching element The four-axis body is separated from the limit section, and the first axle body and/or the second axle body is confined to the locking section. When the door body is at the second opening angle, it continues to open to the maximum opening During the angle process, the first switching element and the second switching element are relatively stationary.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的冰箱,其特征在于,所述锁止段包括连通所述第一上自由段的第一上锁止段、连通所述第一下自由段的第一下锁止段、连通所述第二上自由段的第二上锁止段及连通所述第二下自由段的第二下锁止段,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体同时限位于所述第一上锁止段及所述第一下锁止段,所述第二轴体同时限位于所述第二上锁止段及所述第二下锁止段。The refrigerator according to claim 19, wherein the locking section comprises a first upper locking section communicating with the first upper free section, and a first lower locking section communicating with the first lower free section , The second upper locking section connected with the second upper free section and the second lower locking section connected with the second lower free section, when the door body is at the first opening angle to continue to open to the second opening When the angle is in progress, the first shaft body is confined to the first upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time, and the second shaft body is confined to the second upper locking section at the same time And the second lower locking section.
PCT/CN2020/111583 2019-08-28 2020-08-27 Refrigerator having switch assembly WO2021037103A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910804448.1A CN112444086B (en) 2019-08-28 2019-08-28 Embedded refrigerator with multi-shaft hinge assembly
CN201910804448.1 2019-08-28
CN201910803432.9 2019-08-28
CN201910803419.3A CN112444066B (en) 2019-08-28 2019-08-28 Free-lay refrigerator with multi-axis hinge assembly
CN201910803419.3 2019-08-28
CN201910803432.9A CN112444071B (en) 2019-08-28 2019-08-28 Refrigerator with switching assembly

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021037103A1 true WO2021037103A1 (en) 2021-03-04

Family

ID=74684527

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/111583 WO2021037103A1 (en) 2019-08-28 2020-08-27 Refrigerator having switch assembly

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2021037103A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4151681A (en) * 1977-12-01 1979-05-01 General Electric Company Arrangement for mounting hinge pin sockets to cabinet doors
DE102011116573A1 (en) * 2010-10-26 2012-04-26 Heitek Heine Gmbh Hinge i.e. attachment hinge, for e.g. swingable door of cabinet, has supporting elements fastened to fixed component and pivotable component respectively, where installation depth of hinge lies between specific values in pivotable condition
CN104265103A (en) * 2014-09-18 2015-01-07 广东美的厨房电器制造有限公司 Hinge and home appliance
CN105546911A (en) * 2015-12-21 2016-05-04 青岛海尔股份有限公司 Refrigerator
CN105588398A (en) * 2015-12-29 2016-05-18 青岛海尔股份有限公司 Hinge assembly used for refrigerator door body and refrigerator
CN110068185A (en) * 2016-08-05 2019-07-30 青岛海尔股份有限公司 Refrigerator

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4151681A (en) * 1977-12-01 1979-05-01 General Electric Company Arrangement for mounting hinge pin sockets to cabinet doors
DE102011116573A1 (en) * 2010-10-26 2012-04-26 Heitek Heine Gmbh Hinge i.e. attachment hinge, for e.g. swingable door of cabinet, has supporting elements fastened to fixed component and pivotable component respectively, where installation depth of hinge lies between specific values in pivotable condition
CN104265103A (en) * 2014-09-18 2015-01-07 广东美的厨房电器制造有限公司 Hinge and home appliance
CN105546911A (en) * 2015-12-21 2016-05-04 青岛海尔股份有限公司 Refrigerator
CN105588398A (en) * 2015-12-29 2016-05-18 青岛海尔股份有限公司 Hinge assembly used for refrigerator door body and refrigerator
CN110068185A (en) * 2016-08-05 2019-07-30 青岛海尔股份有限公司 Refrigerator

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021037098A1 (en) Refrigerator with wiring module
WO2021037096A1 (en) Refrigerator provided with switchable hinge assembly
WO2021037095A1 (en) Refrigerator with movable hinge assembly
CN112444077B (en) Refrigerator capable of realizing inward movement of gravity center
WO2021037097A1 (en) Built-in refrigerator
CN112444062B (en) Refrigerator capable of increasing opening degree
CN112444068B (en) Embedded side-by-side combination refrigerator
WO2021037110A1 (en) Free embedded refrigerator
CN112444066B (en) Free-lay refrigerator with multi-axis hinge assembly
CN112444065B (en) Refrigerator capable of opening door in auxiliary mode
CN115110860A (en) Hinge assembly and refrigerator with same
WO2021037119A1 (en) Embedded refrigerator having switching assembly
WO2021037120A1 (en) Embedded refrigerator capable of facilitating door opening
CN115045579A (en) Hinge assembly and refrigeration appliance with same
WO2021037103A1 (en) Refrigerator having switch assembly
CN112444082B (en) Side-by-side combination refrigerator capable of increasing opening degree
CN112444078B (en) Refrigerator capable of realizing inward movement of gravity center
CN112444086B (en) Embedded refrigerator with multi-shaft hinge assembly
CN112444057B (en) Multi-door refrigerator capable of realizing inward movement of gravity center
CN112444080B (en) Multi-door refrigerator capable of increasing opening degree
CN112444083B (en) Refrigerator with multi-axis hinge assembly
CN112444070B (en) Multi-door refrigerator capable of opening door in auxiliary manner
WO2021037104A1 (en) Refrigerator with multi-axis hinge assembly
WO2021037105A1 (en) Refrigerator capable of facilitating door opening
WO2021037108A1 (en) Refrigerator capable of inward shifting center of gravity

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20858024

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20858024

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1